001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 1

Dear Customer, Thank you for selecting Fiat and congratulations on your choice of a Fiat Croma. We have written this handbook to help you get to know all your new Fiat Croma features and use it in the best possible way. You should read it right through before taking the road for the first time. You will find information, tips and important warnings regarding the driving of your car to help you derive the maximum from your Fiat Croma technological features. You are recommended to read carefully the warnings and indications, marked with the respective symbols, at the end of the page:

personal safety;

the car’s wellbeing;

environmental protection.

The enclosed Warranty Booklet lists the services that Fiat offers to its Customers: ❒ the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity ❒ the range of additional services available to Fiat Customers. Best regards and good motoring!

This Owner Handbook describes all Fiat Croma versions. As a consequence, you should consider only the information which is related to the engine and bodywork version of the car you purchased. 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 2

MUST BE READ!

REFUELLING Petrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) not less than 95. K Diesel engines: only refuel with diesel fuel conforming to the European specification EN590. Using other products or mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair and cause the forfeiture of the warranty cover for caused damages as a consequence.

ENGINE STARTING Petrol engines: make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gearshift lever to neutral (positions P or N with automatic transmission); fully depress the clutch pedal (or brake pedal with automatic transmission) without pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to START and release it as soon as the engine has started. Diesel engines: make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gearshift lever to neutral (positions P or N with automatic transmission); fully depress the clutch pedal (or brake pedal with automatic transmission) without pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to ON and wait for the Y and m warning lights to go off; turn the ignition key to START and release it as soon as the engine has started. PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL While working, the catalyst develops a very high temperature. Do not park the car over grass, dry leaves, pine nee- ┮ dles or any other inflammable materials: risk of fire.

RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT The car is fitted with a system that allows continuous diagnosis of the components correlated with emissions to ensure better respect for the environment. 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 3

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES If, after buying the car, you decide to add electrical accessories (that will gradually drain the battery), visit a Fiat Dealership. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the car’s electric system can support the required load. ▵

CODE card Keep the code card in a safe place, not in the car.

SCHEDULED SERVICING Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring it stays in tip-top condition and safeguards its safety features, its environmental friendliness and low running costs for a long time to come.

THE OWNER HANDBOOK CONTAINS… … information, tips and important warnings regarding the safe, correct driving of your car, and its maintenance. Pay particular attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (environmental protection) ! (the car’s wellbeing). 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 4

DDAASSHHBBOOAARRDD AANNDD CCOONNTTRROOLLSS

DASHBOARD INSTRUMENT DASHBOARD...... 5 CRUISE CONTROL ...... 68 AND CONTROLS INSTRUMENT PANEL...... 6 CEILING LIGHTS...... 70 SYMBOLS...... 8 CONTROLS...... 71 SAFETY DEVICES THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM...... 9 INTERIOR EQUIPMENT...... 74 THE KEYS ...... 10 SUN ROOF...... 78 ALARM ...... 14 DOORS ...... 81 OF THE CAR

CORRECT USE DEAD LOCK DEVICE ...... 16 ELECTRIC WINDOW REGULATORS ...... 82 IGNITION DEVICE ...... 19 BOOT ...... 84 ON BOARD INSTRUMENTS ...... 20 ENGINE HOOD ...... 90 WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY ...... 22 ROOF RACK/SKI RACK...... 92 RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY .. 25 HEADLAMPS...... 93 DISPLAY FUNCTIONS...... 28 ABS SYSTEM...... 94 IN AN

EMERGENCY TRIP COMPUTER...... 36 ESP SYSTEM...... 96 SEATS...... 39 ASR SYSTEM ...... 97

CAR HEAD RESTS...... 42 EOBD SYSTEM ...... 98

MAINTENANCE STEERING WHEEL...... 43 T.P.M.S. SYSTEM...... 99 REAR VIEW MIRRORS ...... 44 CAR RADIO...... 100 HEATING/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM ...... 47 USER PURCHASED ACCESSORIES...... 101 TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER...... 49 PARKING SENSORS ...... 102 AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER...... 52 VEHICLE REFUELLING...... 104 EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 62 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION...... 105 INDEX WINDOW CLEANING ...... 65 4 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 5

DASHBOARD

The presence and the position of the instruments and warning lights may vary according to the versions. DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS SAFETY DEVICES OF THE CAR CORRECT USE WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE F0L0516m

fig. 1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. Side air vent - 2. Left steering column stalk: external lights - 3. Instrument panel and warning lights - 4. Right steering column stalk: windscreen, rear window wiper and trip computer controls - 5. Central air vents - 6. Sound system - 7. Front passenger air bag - 8. Glovebox - 9. Heating/ventilation/climate controls - 10. Gearshift lever - 11. Driver’s knees air bag - 12. Driver’s air bag - INDEX 13. Cruise control lever - 14. Control unit access door - 15. Control plate. 5 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 6

INSTRUMENT PANEL 1.8 - 1.9 Multijet 8V versions with multifunctional display A Speedometer (speed indicator) DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS B Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light C Engine coolant temperature gauge SAFETY DEVICES and excessive temperature warning light D Rev counter E multifunctional display

OF THE CAR c CORRECT USE m Warning lights fitted on Multijet versions t F0L0504m Warning light fitted on versions with automatic transmission WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND On versions 1.8 the end scale value of the engine speed indicator is 8000 rpm.

1.8 - 1.9 Multijet 8V with IN AN reconfigurable multifunctional display EMERGENCY A Speedometer (speed indicator) B Fuel level gauge with reserve

CAR warning light

MAINTENANCE C Engine coolant temperature gauge and excessive temperature warning light D Rev counter TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS E Reconfigurable multifunctional display m c F0L0505m Warning lights fitted on Multijet versions INDEX On versions 1.8 the end scale value of the engine speed indicator is 8000 rpm. t Warning light fitted on versions fig. 2 with automatic transmission 6 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 7

2.2 - 1.9 Multijet 16V versions - 2.4 Multijet 20V with multifunctional display DASHBOARD

A Speedometer (speed indicator) AND CONTROLS B Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light SAFETY C Engine coolant temperature gauge DEVICES and excessive temperature warning light D Rev counter

E Multifunctional display OF THE CAR CORRECT USE m c F0L0506m Warning lights fitted on Multijet versions On Multijet versions the end scale value of the engine speed indicator is 6000 rpm. t Warning light fitted on versions WARNING MESSAGES with automatic transmission LIGHTS AND

2.2 - 1.9 Multijet 16V - 2.4 Multijet 20V with reconfigurable multifunctional IN AN display EMERGENCY A Speedometer (speed indicator)

B Fuel level gauge with reserve CAR warning light MAINTENANCE C Engine coolant temperature gauge and excessive temperature warning light

Rev counter TECHNICAL D SPECIFICATIONS

F0L0507m E Reconfigurable multifunctional display m c Warning lights fitted on

Multijet versions INDEX On Multijet versions the end scale value of the engine speed indicator is 6000 rpm. t Warning light fitted on versions fig. 3 with automatic transmission 7 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 8

SYMBOLS The plate summarising the symbols used can be found under the bonnet fig. 4. Special coloured labels have been attached

DASHBOARD near or actually on some of the compo- AND CONTROLS nents of your car. These labels bear symbols that remind you of the precautions to be taken as regards that particular com- SAFETY DEVICES ponent. OF THE CAR CORRECT USE WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND IN AN F0L0099m EMERGENCY fig. 4 CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

8 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 9

THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM OPERATION Warning light Y coming on Each time the key is fitted into the ignition when driving To further protect your car from theft, it switch, the Fiat CODE system control unit ❒ If the warning light Y turns on, this has been fitted with an engine immobilising DASHBOARD sends a recognition code to the engine con- means that the system is running a AND CONTROLS system. This system is automatically acti- trol unit to deactivate the inhibitor. vated when the ignition key is removed. self-test (for example for a voltage The code is sent only if the Fiat CODE sys- drop). At the first stop, turn the igni- An electronic device, in fact, is fitted in each tem control unit has recognised the code tion key to OFF and then back to SAFETY ignition key grip. The device transmits a ra- transmitted from the key. ON: if no failure is detected warning DEVICES dio-frequency signal when the engine is Each time the ignition key is removed, the light Y will not come on. started through a special aerial built into the Fiat CODE system deactivates the func- ❒ If the warning light Y stays on, re- ignition switch. The modulate signal, which tions of the engine electronic control unit. changes each time the engine is started, is peat the procedure described previ- OF THE CAR the “password”, by means of which the If the code has not been recognised cor- ously leaving the key at OFF for over CORRECT USE control unit recognises the key and enables rectly, the warning light Y (where pro- 30 seconds. Should the inconvenience to start the engine. vided) turns on accompanied by the relat- persists, contact a Fiat Dealership. ed message on the display (see chapter “Warning lights and messages”). WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND In this case, the key should be removed and refitted; if the lock continues, possibly try The electronic components in- again with the other key provided with the side the key may be damaged

car. If it is still not possible to start the car if the key is submitted to sharp IN AN contact a Fiat Dealership. knocks. EMERGENCY IMPORTANT Every key has its own code, which must be memorised by the system control unit. To memorise new keys, up to CAR

a maximum of eight, apply to Fiat Dealer- MAINTENANCE ship. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

9 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 10

THE KEYS All the keys and the CODE card must be handed over to the new owner when selling

DASHBOARD CODE CARD fig. 5

AND CONTROLS the car. The car is delivered with two copies of the ignition key and with the CODE card which bears the following: SAFETY DEVICES ❒ the electronic code A ❒ the mechanical key code B to be giv- fig. 5 F0L0002m en to the Fiat Dealership when order- ing duplicate keys. OF THE CAR CORRECT USE IMPORTANT In order to ensure perfect efficiency of the electronic devices contained inside the keys, they should never be exposed to direct sunlight. WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

10 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 11

Opening the doors and the tailgate Locking the doors and the tailgate Briefly press button Ë for remote un- Briefly press button Á for remote lock- locking of doors, tailgate and fuel filler cap ing of doors, tailgate and fuel filler cap and DASHBOARD

and simultaneous alarm (where provided) simultaneous alarm (where provided) ac- AND CONTROLS deactivation, timed switching on of the in- tivation, switching off of the internal ceil- ternal ceiling lights and double flashing of ing lights and single flashing of direction in- direction indicators. dicators. SAFETY DEVICES Press button Ë for more than 2 seconds Press button Á for more than 2 seconds to open the windows. to close the windows. If the button is fig. 6 F0L0100m briefly pressed twice, the dead lock device Doors will be unlocked automatically if the is activated (see paragraph “Dead lock de- fuel inertial cut-off switch comes into op- vice”). KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROL OF THE CAR eration. CORRECT USE fig. 6 IMPORTANT If the remote control does The “Set-up menu” on the display (see This key operates the ignition switch. not work properly, it is still possible to paragraph “Multifunction display”) enables lock the car doors by following the pro- Button Ë shall be used for remote open- to set the system so that by pressing but- WARNING

cedure described in paragraph “Emer- MESSAGES ing of doors and tailgate and for remote ton Ë, only the driver’s door is unlocked. gency closing” LIGHTS AND deactivation of the alarm (where provid- In this event, to unlock the other doors ed). press quickly button Ë twice.

Button Á shall be used for remote lock- IMPORTANT If the remote control does IN AN

ing of doors and tailgate and for remote not work properly, it is still possible to EMERGENCY activation of the alarm (where provided). carry out the emergency opening procedure by using the metal insert set inside Button R shall be used for remote the remote control (see “Emergency opening of the tailgate. opening using the metal insert of the key”). CAR When unlocking the doors, the passen- MAINTENANCE ger’s compartment lights will come on for a preset time. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

11 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 12

Opening the tailgate by the remote control Press button R to open the tailgate by DASHBOARD

AND CONTROLS remote control even if the alarm (where provided) is on. Opening the tailgate is accompanied by the SAFETY DEVICES direction indicators flashing twice; closing is accompanied by a single flash (only if the alarm is on). fig. 7 F0L00382m fig. 8 F0L0101m If the alarm is on, when the tailgate is opened the alarm system switches off vol-

OF THE CAR LED signals on door lock button Request for additional remote CORRECT USE umetric protection and the tailgate perimetral protection sensor. fig. 7 controls When closing the tailgate again, volumet- When locking the doors, led A switches The system can recognise up to 8 keys with ric and perimetral protection sensors are on for about 3 seconds and than starts incorporated remote control. Should a new WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND restored. flashing (deterrence function). key with remote control be necessary, contact a Fiat Dealership, taking with you the IMPORTANT If the remote control does Once doors are locked, if one or more CODE card and the keys, a personal iden- not work properly, it is however possi- doors or the tailgate are not closed cor- tity document and the car’s ownership doc- rectly, the led and direction indicators IN AN ble to open the tailgate through the me- uments. start flashing quickly. EMERGENCY chanical lever set on the lock inside the boot (see paragraph “Boot” in this section). Replacing the battery of the key with remote control fig. 8 CAR

MAINTENANCE To replace the battery, proceed as follows: ❒ move aside lever A and take out the emergency metal insert B; Used batteries are harmful to ❒ the environment. They should

TECHNICAL take out the battery case C using the

SPECIFICATIONS emergency metal insert, move aside be disposed of as specified by battery D and replace it making sure law in the special containers the bias is correct; provided, or take them to a Fiat Deal- ership, which will deal with their dis- INDEX ❒ refit the battery case C and the emer- posal. gency metal insert B inside the key. 12 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 13 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 9 F0L0103m fig. 10 F0L0102m fig. 11 F0L0205m

EMERGENCY OPENING USING The metal insert acts on the interested EMERGENCY CLOSING OF THE CAR THE METAL INSERT door. fig. 11 CORRECT USE If the remote control does not work For emergency opening proceed as fol- To lock the doors if the remote control properly (e.g.: battery flat), it is however lows: does not work properly, proceed as fol- WARNING MESSAGES possible to use the emergency metal in- ❒ raise the handle, fit the metal insert in- lows: LIGHTS AND sert set inside the remote control. to the revolving plug and turn it coun- ❒ fit the metal insert into the slot C set The metal insert operates the driver’s side terclockwise; on the doors and turn it in the direc- lock (the pawl is located under the out- tion of the arrow (as shown in the fig- ❒ remove the key and lower the handle; IN AN door handle fig. 9). ure). EMERGENCY ❒ raise the handle and open the door. To use the metal insert set inside the re- IMPORTANT Before carrying out the mote control, proceed as follows fig. 10: emergency door locking, check whether

❒ the independent boot locking function on CAR move aside lever A and take out the the multifunction display set-up menu is emergency metal insert B, at the same off (see paragraph “Multifunction display”). MAINTENANCE time. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

13 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 14

ALARM Volumetric and anti-raising protections can be cut off by operating the front ceil- (where provided) ing light controls (see paragraphs “Volu- metric protection sensors” and “Anti-rais- DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS WHEN THE ALARM ing sensor” on the following pages). IS TRIGGERED IMPORTANT The engine immobiliser function is guaranteed by the Fiat CODE SAFETY DEVICES The alarm comes into action in the fol- system, which is automatically activated lowing cases: when the ignition key is removed. ❒ unlawful opening of one of the doors, fig. 12 F0L0100m bonnet or boot (perimetral protec- HOW TO ACTIVATE tion); THE ALARM fig. 12

OF THE CAR If the doors, bonnet and boot are shut CORRECT USE ❒ attempt to start the engine with unau- With the doors, bonnet and boot shut and correctly and the warning “beep” is re- thorised key; ignition key to OFF or removed, point peated, the system self-diagnostics has detected a system operating fault. It is there- ❒ battery cable cutting; the key with remote control or removed, point the key with remote control in the fore necessary to contact a Fiat Dealer- WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND ❒ presence of moving bodies in the pas- direction of the car, then press and release ship. Á senger’s compartment (volumetric the button . IMPORTANT Operating a door with the protection); With the exception of certain markets, metal insert of the key will not activate the

IN AN ❒ abnormal raising/sloping of the car. the system sounds a “beep” and the doors alarm. EMERGENCY Depending on the markets, the cutting in are locked. IMPORTANT The alarm is built in com- of the alarm causes operation of the siren Engagement of the alarm is preceded by pliance with the law and regulations of the and direction indicators (for about 26 sec- a self-diagnostic test. If a fault is detected different destination countries. CAR onds). The ways of operating and the num- the system sounds a further warning

MAINTENANCE ber of cycles may vary depending on the “beep” and the display shows the relevant markets. message (see section “Warning lights and A maximum number of sound/sight cycles messages”). is however envisaged. In this case, switch the alarm system off by TECHNICAL pressing button Ë, check that the doors, SPECIFICATIONS bonnet and tailgate are properly shut, then switch the system on again by pressing button Á. INDEX

14 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 15

HOW TO DEACTIVATE THE ALARM fig. 12 Press button Ë of the key with remote DASHBOARD

control. AND CONTROLS The system will react as follows (with the exception of certain markets): SAFETY ❒ two brief flashes of the direction in- DEVICES dicators; F0L0171m F0L0172m ❒ two brief “beeps”; fig. 13 fig. 14 ❒ door unlocking.

VOLUMETRIC PROTECTION ANTI-RAISING SENSOR OF THE CAR CORRECT USE IMPORTANT Operating a door with the SENSORS The anti-raising sensor detects any ab- metal insert of the key will not activate the The volumetric sensors are located inside normal car raising/sloping, even partial alarm. the front ceiling light in the passenger’s (e.g.: attempt to remove a wheel). WARNING MESSAGES To deactivate the alarm, turn the ignition compartment. To make sure that the vol- This sensor can detect the smallest car LIGHTS AND key to ON. umetric sensors are working properly, sideslip angle changes, both longitudinally check that doors, boot, bonnet, windows and transversally. Sideslip angle changes and sunroof (where provided) are shut. lower than 0.5°/min. (e.g.: slow tyre flat- tening) are not considered). IN AN Anti-raising protection EMERGENCY deactivation Anti-raising protection If it is necessary to switch on the alarm deactivation CAR when animals or people are in the car, To deactivate the anti-raising protection press button A-fig. 13 on the front ceil- (for example when towing the car with MAINTENANCE ing light to deactivate the volumetric pro- alarm on) press button B-fig. 14 on the tection. front ceiling light. Sensor cut-out stays on Deactivation is needed also in the pres- until activating the central door opening TECHNICAL

ence of additional independent heater and again. SPECIFICATIONS when it is switched on with the remote control. INDEX

15 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 16

INDICATIONS OF ATTEMPTS DEAD LOCK DEVICE TO BREAK IN (where provided) Any attempt to break in is indicated by DASHBOARD

AND CONTROLS turning on of warning light Y (if pro- This safety device enables to inhibit: vided) on the instrument panel with the ❒ relevant message on the display (see sec- door internal handles; tion “Warning lights and messages”). ❒ button and for locking/unlocking SAFETY A B DEVICES the doors fig. 15; HOW TO CUT OFF THE ALARM thus hindering doors opening from inside fig. 15 F0L0003m SYSTEM the passenger’s compartment in case of To deactivate the alarm system com- attempt to break-into (e.g. window break- OF THE CAR

CORRECT USE pletely (for instance during prolonged in- ing). WARNING activity of the car) simply lock the car us- The dead lock device guarantees the best If the battery of the key with ing the emergency locking. protection against unwanted access. remote control is down, the IMPORTANT To cut-out the alarm if re- Therefore, it should be actuated every dead lock device can be activated on- WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND mote control batteries are down or the time the car is parked and left unattend- ly using the metal insert of the key on system is failing, fit the key into the igni- ed. the driver’s side door as described pre- tion switch and turn it to ON. viously: in this case the dead lock device is active only on the rear doors. IN AN EMERGENCY

WARNING

CAR Once the dead lock device

MAINTENANCE has been actuated, doors cannot be opened from inside the car in any way whatsoever. For this reason, make sure there are no persons left inside the car. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

16 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 17

Device activation is signalled by three Device deactivation flashes of the direction indicators and flashing of the led on the driver door pan- The device is deactivated automatically on el (see the table on next page). every door in the following cases: DASHBOARD

❒ AND CONTROLS Should one of the doors be not perfectly when unlocking the doors by the re- closed, the dead lock device is not acti- mote control; vated, thus preventing that a person get- ❒ when unlocking only the driver’s door SAFETY ting into the car from the open door re- by the remote control; DEVICES mains blocked inside the passenger’s com- ❒ when turning the ignition key to ON. fig. 16 F0L0100m partment when he/she closes the door.

Device activation fig. 16 OF THE CAR CORRECT USE The device is automatically activated on every door in the following cases: ❒ pressing twice button Á of the key WARNING MESSAGES with remote control LIGHTS AND IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

17 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 18

The main functions that can be activated with the keys or with the emergency metals insert are the following:

Door opening Door closing Window Window Dead lock Tailgate DASHBOARD

AND CONTROLS and fuel and fuel opening closing (where opening filler cap filler cap provided) unlocking locking SAFETY DEVICES Key with Press briefly Pressing briefly Prolonged Prolonged Double pressing Pressing on remote control button Ë button Á pressing pressing on button Á button R (over 2 seconds) (over 2 seconds) on button Ë on button Á

OF THE CAR Emergency Turn the key in a Turn the key CORRECT USE metal counter clockwise in a clockwise insert direction direction – – – – (driver's side) (driver's side) WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND Direction 2 flashings 1 flashing 2 flashings 1 flashing 3 flashings 2 flashings indicators flashing (only IN AN with key with EMERGENCY remote control)

LED on door lock Turning off Turning on fixed Turning off Deterrence led Double flashing,

CAR button deterrence led for about 3 deterrence led flashing followed by seconds, followed deterrence led – MAINTENANCE by deterrence flashing led flashing

TECHNICAL IMPORTANT The emergency metal insert will unlock only the door. SPECIFICATIONS IMPORTANT Window opening operation is a consequence of a door unlocking control; window closing operation is a consequence of a door locking control. INDEX

18 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 19

IGNITION SWITCH STEERING COLUMN LOCK

The key can be turned to 3 different po- Engaging

sitions fig. 17: DASHBOARD The steering column lock will engage 5 AND CONTROLS ❒ OFF: engine off, key can be removed, seconds after removing the key from the steering column locked. Certain elec- ignition switch (engine off). trical devices (e.g.: sound system, pow- SAFETY er windows…) can work. Disengaging DEVICES ❒ ON: driving position. All electrical de- fig. 17 F0L0004m The steering column lock will disengage vices are powered. after fitting the key into the ignition switch. ❒ START: engine starting. IMPORTANT Switching the engine off OF THE CAR

WARNING CORRECT USE when the car is running will not engage the The ignition switch is fitted with an elec- If the ignition device is tam- tronic safety system that, in the event the steering column lock. The multifunction pered with (e.g.: attempted display will show the relevant message engine is not started, turns back the igni- theft), have it checked over by a Fiat tion key to OFF before repeating the (see section “Warning lights and Mes- WARNING MESSAGES

Dealership as soon as possible. LIGHTS AND starting operation. sages”). IMPORTANT If, after trying to turn the instrument panel on and/or to start the

engine, the display will show the message IN AN

“Check vehicle protection system”, repeat EMERGENCY the operation rocking the steering wheel WARNING to facilitate steering unlocking. Displaying of this message does not impair steering

When getting out of the car, CAR always remove the key to column lock operation. prevent any occupants from acci- IMPORTANT When the vehicle is mo- MAINTENANCE dentally activating the controls. Re- ving, the electronic key must remain in the member to engage the handbrake ignition device. That ensures that the stee- and if the car is parked on uphill slope ring lock is disabled during vehicle hand- to engage the first gear. If the car is TECHNICAL

ling (e.g., when the vehicle is towed). SPECIFICATIONS facing downhill, engage the reverse gear (position P with automatic transmission). Never leave unsupervised

children in the car. INDEX

19 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 20

WARNING INSTRUMENTS It is absolutely forbidden to carry out whatever after- REV. COUNTER fig. 18 DASHBOARD

AND CONTROLS market operation involving steering system or steering column modifica- Rev counter shows engine rpm. tions (e.g.: installation of anti-theft The rev. counter end of scale values can device) that could badly affect per- SAFETY

DEVICES vary based on the version. formance and safety, cause the lapse of warranty and also result in non- IMPORTANT The electronic injection compliance of the car with homolo- control system gradually shuts off the flow fig. 18 F0L0512m gation requirements. of fuel when the engine is “over-revving” resulting in a gradual loss of engine pow-

OF THE CAR When the engine is idling, the rev counter CORRECT USE er. may indicate a gradual or sudden higher- ing of the speed. This is normal as it takes place during nor- WARNING MESSAGES mal operation, for example when activat- LIGHTS AND ing the climate control system or the fan. In particular a slow change in the speed preserves the battery charge. IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

20 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 21 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS

km/h SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 19 F0L0513m fig. 20 F0L0514m fig. 21 F0L0515m

FUEL LEVEL GAUGE fig. 19 ENGINE COOLANT IMPORTANT If the needle sets at the bot- OF THE CAR TEMPERATURE GAUGE fig. 20 tom of the scale (low temperature) with CORRECT USE This shows the amount of fuel left in the warning light B on, it means that the sys- fuel tank. The turning on of the warning light B in- tem is malfunctioning. Contact a Fiat Deal- The reserve warning light A turns on to dicates that the coolant fluid temperature ership to have the system inspected. WARNING MESSAGES indicate that approx. 7 to 9 litres of fuel is too high; in this case, stop the engine LIGHTS AND are left in the tank. and contact a Fiat Dealership. E - tank empty. This shows the temperature of the engine coolant fluid and begins working when the fluid temperature exceeds approx. 50°C. IN AN F - tank full (see the indications given in If the needle reaches the red EMERGENCY paragraph “At the filling station"). Under normal conditions, the needle area, stop the engine immedi- Do not travel with the fuel tank almost should move to different positions of the ately and contact a Fiat Deal- ership.

empty: the gaps in fuel delivery could dam- scale according to the working conditions CAR age the catalyst. and engine cooling conditions. MAINTENANCE

SPEEDOMETER fig. 21 TECHNICAL It shows the engine speed. SPECIFICATIONS The speed indicator end of scale values

can vary based on the version. INDEX

21 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 22

MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY

DASHBOARD (where provided) AND CONTROLS The vehicle may have a multifunctional display that provides the user with useful in- SAFETY DEVICES formation, based on what was previously set, while driving. fig. 22 F0L0071m fig. 23 F0L0029m “STANDARD” SCREEN fig. 22 The standard screen shows the following

OF THE CAR CONTROL BUTTONS fig. 23 Note Buttons + and – activate different CORRECT USE indications: functions according to the following situ- A Date + To scroll the displayed menu and the ations: related options upwards or to increase B Odometer (covered km or miles) the value displayed. To adjust light inside the passenger

WARNING Clock MESSAGES C compartment LIGHTS AND MODE Brief press to open the menu D External temperature and/or to move to next screen – to adjust instrument panel, sound sys- E Headlight aiming position (only with or to confirm the option re- tem and automatic climate control system dipped beam headlights on). quired. display brightness when standard screen IN AN Note When opening one of the front is active. EMERGENCY Long press to go back to the doors, the display will turn on and show standard screen. Setup menu for a few seconds the clock and the km or – to scroll the menu options upwards and mi covered. – To scroll the displayed menu and the downwards; CAR related options downwards or to de- – to increase or decrease values during set- MAINTENANCE crease the value displayed. tings. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

22 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 23

SETUP MENU fig. 24 Selecting a menu option Press button MODE for long: The menu comprises a series of functions – press briefly button MODE to select – to quit the setup menu and to save on- arranged in a “circular fashion” which can the menu option to set; ly the settings stored yet by the user (and

be selected through buttons + and – to DASHBOARD

– press buttons + or – (by single press- confirmed by pressing briefly button AND CONTROLS access the different select operations and es) to select the new setting; MODE). settings (setup) given in the following paragraphs. – press briefly button MODE to store the The setup menu displaying is timed; when new setting and to go back to the previ- SAFETY

quitting the menu due to timing expiry, DEVICES The setup menu can be activated by press- ously selected menu option. ing briefly button MODE, only with the only settings stored yet by the user (and car turned on (with car off, only the re- Selecting “Date” and “Set Clock”: confirmed by pressing briefly button MODE) will be saved. duced menu can be displayed). – briefly press button MODE to select Single presses on buttons + or – will scroll the first value to change (e.g. hours /min- OF THE CAR the setup menu options. utes or year / month / day); CORRECT USE Handling modes differ with each other ac- – press buttons + or – (by single press- cording to the characteristic of the option es) to select the new setting; selected. – briefly press button MODE to store the WARNING MESSAGES new setting and to go to the next setup LIGHTS AND menu option, if this is the last one you will NOTE If the car is equipped with the Ra- go back to the previously selected option of dionavigation System, the only functions the main menu.

that can be adjusted/set through the in- IN AN

strument panel display are the following: EMERGENCY “Speed limit”, “Automatic headlight daylight sensor” (where provided) and “S.B.R. (Seat Belt Reminder) buzzer reactivation” (where provided). The other functions are CAR

displayed by and can be adjusted/set MAINTENANCE through the Radionavigation System display. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

23 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 24

Example: Example: Briefly press button MODE to start surfing from the Italiano Deutsch standard screen. To surf the menu use buttons + or –. Day Brasilian English Note For safety reasons, when the car is running, it is DASHBOARD possible to access only the reduced menu (for setting AND CONTROLS Turkçe Español the “Speed limit”). When the car is stationary access Year Month to the whole menu is enabled. On cars provided with Nederland Français the Connect Nav+ system, many functions are displayed SAFETY DEVICES Polski Português on the navigator display. MODE briefly press MODE button briefly OF THE CAR CORRECT USE press SET TIME SET DATE button TRIP B DATA HEADL. SENSOR SEE RADIO WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND SPEED BEEP KEY

IN AN MENU

EMERGENCY AUTOCLOSE

EXIT MENU UNITS CAR MAINTENANCE REAR SIDEBAGS LANGUAGE

PASSENGER BAG BUZZER VOLUME TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS F0L1195g BUTTON VOL. SERVICE BELT BUZZER INDEX

fig. 24 24 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 25

RECONFIGURABLE A B MULTIFUNCTION

DISPLAY F DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS (where provided) E

The car can be provided with the recon- SAFETY figurable multifunction display that shows DEVICES useful information, according to the pre- D C vious settings made, necessary when dri- fig. 25 F0L0518m fig. 26 F0L0029m ving.

CONTROL BUTTONS fig. 26 Note Buttons + and – activate different OF THE CAR “STANDARD” SCREEN fig. 25 functions according to the following situ- CORRECT USE The standard screen shows the following + To scroll the displayed menu and the ations: indications: related options upwards or to increase the value displayed. – to adjust instrument panel, sound sys-

tem and automatic climate control sys- WARNING A Time MESSAGES LIGHTS AND B Date MODE Brief press to open the menu tem display brightness when standard and/or to move to next screen or to con- screen is active; C Odometer (displays the kilometres, or firm the option required. miles, covered) – to scroll the menu options upwards and

downwards; IN AN Vehicle status signals (ex. doors open Long press to go back to the standard D EMERGENCY or the presence of ice on the road, screen. – to increase or decrease values during set- etc.) – To scroll the displayed menu and the tings. E Headlamp stability position (only with related options downwards or to de- low beams on) crease the value displayed. CAR F External temperature MAINTENANCE Note When opening one of the front doors, the display will turn on and show for a few seconds the clock and the km or TECHNICAL

mi covered. SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

25 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 26

SETUP MENU fig. 27 Selecting an option in the main menu Selecting an option in the main menu with without submenu: submenu: The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a “circular fashion” which can – press briefly button MODE to select – press briefly button MODE to display DASHBOARD

AND CONTROLS be selected through buttons + and – to the menu option to set; the first submenu option; access the different select operations and settings (setup) given below. For certain – press buttons + or – (by single press- – press buttons + or – (by single press- options (Set time and Units) there is a sub- es) to select the new setting; es) to scroll all submenu options; SAFETY DEVICES menu. – press briefly button MODE to store the – press briefly button MODE to select The setup menu can be activated by press- new setting and to go back to the previ- the displayed submenu option and to en- ing briefly button MODE. ously selected menu option. ter the relevant setup menu; Single presses on buttons + or – will scroll – press buttons + or – (by single press-

OF THE CAR es) to select the new setting; CORRECT USE the setup menu options. Handling modes differ with each other according to the – press briefly button MODE to store the characteristic of the option selected. new setting and to go back to the previ- If the car is equipped with Connect Nav+, ously selected submenu option. WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND the only functions that can be adjusted/set through the instrument panel display are the following: “Dimmer”, “Speed Beep”, “Headl. sensor” (where provided), “Belt IN AN buzzer” and “Passenger bag”. The other EMERGENCY functions are displayed by and can be adjusted/set through the Connect Nav+ system display. CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

26 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 27

Example: Briefly press button MODE to start surfing from the standard Day Deutsch English screen. To surf the menu use buttons + or -. Note For safety reasons, when the car is running, it is possible to access on- Year Month Español DASHBOARD

Italiano ly the reduced menu (for setting “Dimmer” and “Speed Beep”). AND CONTROLS When the car is stationary access to the whole menu is enabled. Brasilian Français On cars provided with Connect Nav+ many functions are displayed on the navigator display. SAFETY Turkçe Portugês DEVICES MODE Nederlands briefly press button

MENU EXIT MENU OF THE CAR MODE SPEED BEEP CORRECT USE briefly press REAR SIDEBAGS button HEADLAMP SENSOR WARNING PASSENGER AIRBAG MESSAGES LIGHTS AND

TRIP B DATA SERVICE IN AN

SEAT BELT BUZZER SET TIME EMERGENCY

SET DATE CAR BUTTON VOLUME MAINTENANCE

SEE RADIO BUZZER VOLUME

F0L4023g TECHNICAL

KEY SPECIFICATIONS LANGUAGE AUTOCLOSE UNITS INDEX fig. 27 27 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 28

DISPLAY FUNCTIONS (see Multifunctional display or Reconfigurable multifunctional display) DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS Speed Beep (Speed limit) Note The possible setting is between 30 To cancel the setting, proceed as follows: and 250 km/h, or between 20 and 155 With this function it is possible to set the mph depending on the unit set previous- – briefly press button MODE: (On) will car speed limit (km/h or mph); when this flash on the display;

SAFETY ly (see “Distance unit (Dist. Unit)” para- DEVICES limit is exceeded the driver is immediate- graph described later. Every press on but- ly alerted (see section “Warning lights and – press button – : (Off) will flash on the ton +/– increases/decreases by 5 units. display; messages”). Keeping the button +/– pressed obtains To set the speed limit, proceed as follows: the automatic fast increase or decrease. – briefly press button MODE to go back When you are near the required setting to the menu screen or press the button OF THE CAR CORRECT USE – briefly press button MODE, the display complete adjustment by single presses. for long to go back to the standard screen will show wording (Speed Beep); without storing settings. – briefly press button MODE to go back – press button + or – to select activation to the menu screen or press the button (On) or deactivation (Off) of the speed for long to go back to the standard screen WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND limit; without storing settings. – if selecting (On), press button + or – to select the required speed limit and then

IN AN press MODE to confirm. EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

28 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 29

Headlamp sensor Trip B data (Trip On/Off) Set time (Setting the clock) (Automatic headlight sensor Through this option it is possible to acti- This function enables to set the clock sensitivity adjustment) vate (On) or deactivate (Off) the Trip B through two sub-menus: “Time” and

(where provided) DASHBOARD (partial trip). “Mode”. AND CONTROLS With this function it is possible to adjust For further information see “Trip com- Proceed as follows: the light sensor sensitivity according to 3 puter”. – briefly press button MODE, the display

levels (level 1 = min. level, level 2 = av- SAFETY erage level, level 3 = max. level); the high- For activation / deactivation, proceed as will show the two submenus “Time” and DEVICES er the sensitivity is, the lower is the ex- follows: “Mode”; ternal light intensity required to switch on – briefly press button MODE: On or Off – press button + or – to scroll the two the lights. will flash on the display according to pre- submenus;

vious setting; – select the required submenu and then OF THE CAR To set the light level required, proceed as CORRECT USE press briefly MODE; follows: – press button + or – to select the re- – briefly press button MODE, the previ- quired level; – if selecting “Time”: briefly press button MODE, “hours” will flash on the display; ously set level will flash on the display; – briefly press button MODE to go back WARNING MESSAGES – press button + or – to select the re- to the menu screen or press the button – press button + or – for setting; LIGHTS AND quired level; for long to go back to the standard screen – press button MODE, “minutes” will without storing settings. flash on the display; – briefly press button MODE to go back to the menu screen or press the button – press button + or – for setting. IN AN for long to go back to the standard screen EMERGENCY without storing settings. CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

29 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 30

Note Every press on button + or – in- Set date (Setting the date) See radio (Audio repetition) creases/decreases by 1 unit. Keeping the With this function the display repeats in- button pressed obtains automatic fast in- This function enables to update the date (day – month – year). formation relevant to the sound system.

DASHBOARD crease or decrease. When you are near AND CONTROLS the required setting complete adjustment To correct the date proceed as follows: – Radio: selected radio station frequency by single presses. or RDS message, automatic tuning acti- – briefly press button MODE: “year” will vation or AutoSTore; – if selecting “Mode”: briefly press but- flash on the display; SAFETY DEVICES ton MODE, “24h” or “12h mode will – audio CD, MP3 CD: track number; flash on the display; – press button + or – for setting; – CD Changer: CD number and track – press button + or – to select “24h” or – briefly press button MODE: “month” number; “12h”. will flash on the display; – Cassette: operating method. OF THE CAR

CORRECT USE After setting, briefly press button MODE – press button + or – for setting; to go back to the submenu screen or To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) press the button for long to go back to the – briefly press button MODE: “day” will sound system info displaying proceed as main menu screen without storing set- flash on the display; follows: tings.

WARNING – press button or for setting.

MESSAGES + –

LIGHTS AND – briefly press button MODE: On or Off – press again button MODE for long to Note Every press on button + or – in- will flash on the display according to pre- go back to the standard screen or to the creases/decreases by 1 unit. Keeping the vious setting; main menu according to the current menu button pressed obtains automatic fast in- – press button + or – to select the re- IN AN level. crease or decrease. When you are near

EMERGENCY quired level; the required setting complete adjustment by single presses. – briefly press button MODE to go back to the menu screen or press the button – briefly press button MODE to go back

CAR for long to go back to the standard screen to the menu screen or press the button without storing settings. MAINTENANCE for long to go back to the standard screen without storing settings. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

30 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 31

Key Autoclose (Automatic central Units (Setting units) With this function it is possible to decide door locking when travelling) With this function it is possible to set the the door opening mode by selecting one When activated (On), this function locks units through the submenu: “Distances”, of the following options: DASHBOARD automatically the doors when the car “Consumption” and “Temperature” AND CONTROLS – open doors: to unlock all doors, except speed exceeds 20 km/h. (where provided). the tailgate To activate or to deactivate this function To set the required unit proceed as fol- SAFETY – open driver’s door (op. drv. door): to proceed as follows: lows: DEVICES unlock just the driver’s door (where pro- – briefly press button , the display vided) – briefly press button MODE to display MODE the submenu; will show the submenus; – open all: to unlock every door including the tailgate – briefly press button MODE: On or Off – press button + or – to scroll the sub-

menus; OF THE CAR

will flash on the display according to pre- CORRECT USE The car is delivered with this function in vious setting; “Open all” mode. – select the required submenu and then – press button + or – to select the re- press briefly button MODE; Proceed as follows: quired level; – if selecting “Distances”: pressing button WARNING MESSAGES – briefly press button MODE, the previ- briefly, the display will show “km” LIGHTS AND ous setting will flash on the display; – briefly press button MODE to go back MODE to the menu screen or press the button or “mi” according to previous setting; – press button or for setting; + – for long to go back to the standard screen – press button + or – to select the re- without storing settings; – briefly press button MODE to go back quired level; IN AN EMERGENCY to the menu screen or press the button – Press again button MODE for long to – if selecting “Consumption”: briefly press for long to go back to the standard screen go back to the standard screen or to the button MODE the display will show without storing settings. main menu according to the current menu “km/l”, “l/100km” or “mpg” according to level. previous setting; CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

31 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 32

If the distance unit set is “km” the fuel con- Language (Selecting the language) Buzzer volume sumption unit will be displayed in km/l or (Setting the buzzer volume) l/100km. Display messages can be shown (after setting) in different languages: Italian, German, With this function the volume of the DASHBOARD

AND CONTROLS If set unit is “mi” the display will show fu- English, Spanish, French, Portuguese, Pole buzzer accompanying any failure/warning el consumption in “mpg”. (where provided) Turkish and Brazilian. indication can be adjusted according to 8 – press button + or – to select the re- To set the required language proceed as levels. SAFETY DEVICES quired level; follows: To adjust the volume proceed as follows: – if selecting “Temperature”: pressing but- – briefly press button MODE: the previ- – briefly press button MODE: the previ- ton MODE briefly, the display will show ously set “language” will flash on the dis- ously set volume “level” will flash on the “°C” or “°F” according to previous set- play; display; ting;

OF THE CAR – press button + or – to select the re- – press button + or – for setting; CORRECT USE – press button + or – to select the required level; quired level. – briefly press button MODE to go back – briefly press button MODE to go back to the menu screen or press the button After setting, briefly press button MODE to the menu screen or press the button for long to go back to the standard screen WARNING MESSAGES to go back to the submenu screen or for long to go back to the standard screen LIGHTS AND without storing settings. press the button for long to go back to the without storing settings. main menu screen without storing settings. IN AN – press again button MODE for long to EMERGENCY go back to the standard screen or to the main menu according to the current menu level. CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

32 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 33

Button volume Service (Scheduled Servicing) Note The “Service schedule” includes car (Adjusting the button volume) maintenance every 30,000 km (or 18,000 This function displays information relat- miles) or every year; this is shown auto- With this function the volume of the ed to kilometric or time based frequen- matically, with the ignition key at , ON DASHBOARD roger-beep accompanying the activation cies for maintenance checks. starting from 2,000 km (or equivalent val- AND CONTROLS of buttons MODE, + and – can be ad- Proceed as follows: ue in miles) or 30 days from this deadline justed according to 8 levels. and it is shown again every 200 km (or – briefly press button MODE: service in SAFETY To adjust the volume proceed as follows: equivalent value in miles). Below 200 km DEVICES km or mi, according to previous setting, servicing indications are displayed more – briefly press button MODE: the previ- will be displayed (see paragraph “Distance frequently. Servicing indication will be dis- ously set volume “level” will flash on the unit”); played in km or mi according to previous display; – briefly press button MODE to go back setting. When a programmed maintenance interval (coupon) is near to come, turning – press button or for setting; to the menu screen or press the button OF THE CAR

+ – CORRECT USE for long to go back to the standard screen the ignition key to ON, the display will – briefly press button MODE to go back without storing settings. show the message “Service” followed by to the menu screen or press the button the number of km/mi or days to go before for long to go back to the standard screen car servicing. Contact a Fiat Dealership to WARNING MESSAGES

without storing settings. carry out any service operation provided LIGHTS AND by the “Service schedule” and to reset the Seat belt buzzer display. (S.B.R. buzzer reactivation) IN AN

This function can be only displayed after EMERGENCY Fiat Dealership has deactivated the S.B.R. system (see paragraph “S.B.R. system” in section “Safety devices”). CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

33 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 34

Passenger airbag g

Turning the passenger side front 6 1 g 0 1 4 1

and side chest protection air bags L 0 0 4 F L DASHBOARD on/off (Side Bags) (if foreseen) 0 F AND CONTROLS fig. 28 This function is used to turn the passen-

SAFETY ger side front and side chest protection DEVICES air bags on/off (Side Bags). + + MODE MODE Proceed as follows: – – g 4 1

– press button MODE and, after display- 0 g 4 2 L 1 0 ing of messages (Passenger airbag: off) (to 0 F OF THE CAR 4 CORRECT USE L 0

deactivate) or (Passenger airbag: on) (to F activate) by pressing buttons + and –, press again button MODE; WARNING

MESSAGES – display will show the confirmation mes- LIGHTS AND sage; + MODE + MODE – press buttons + or – to select (Yes) (to – – g

confirm activation/deactivation) or (No) 5 1 IN AN 0 g 4 3 1 (to abort); L 0 0 EMERGENCY 4 F L 0 – briefly press button MODE, to display F the confirmation message and to go back to the menu screen or press the button CAR for long to go back to the standard screen

MAINTENANCE without storing settings. fig. 28 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

34 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 35

Rear Sidebags

Turning the rear side chest g 2 2 g 0 7 4

protection air bags on/off 1 L 0 0 4 F L DASHBOARD

(Rear side bags) (if foreseen) 0 AND CONTROLS fig. 29 F This function is used to turn the rear side

chest protection air bags on/off (Rear Side SAFETY Bags). + + DEVICES MODE MODE Proceed as follows: – – g 0

– press the MODE button and, after dis- 2 0 g 4 8 L 1

playing the message on the screen (Rear 0 0 OF THE CAR F 4 CORRECT USE L

Sidebags: off) (to turn off) or the message 0 (Rear Sidebags: on) (to turn on) using the F + and – buttons, press the MODE button again; WARNING MESSAGES – display will show the confirmation mes- + + LIGHTS AND sage; MODE MODE – –

– press buttons + or – to select (Yes) (to g 1 2 IN AN 0 g 4 confirm activation/deactivation) or (No) 9 1 L EMERGENCY 0 0 4 F

(to abort); L 0 F – briefly press button MODE, to display the confirmation message and to go back to the menu screen or press the button CAR

for long to go back to the standard screen MAINTENANCE without storing settings. fig. 29 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

35 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 36

Exit Menu TRIP COMPUTER Both functions are resettable (reset - start of new mission). This is the last function that closes the cir- (where provided) cular setting cycle listed in the initial menu “General Trip” displays the figures relat- DASHBOARD

AND CONTROLS screen. ing to: General features Briefly press button MODE to go back to – Range the standard screen without storing set- The “Trip computer” is provided on cars fitted with multifunction display or re- – Trip distance SAFETY DEVICES tings. configurable multifunction display. Press button – to return to the first menu The “Trip computer” displays information – Average consumption option. (with ignition key at ON), relating to the – Instant consumption operating status of the car. This function comprises the “General trip” concerning – Average speed OF THE CAR CORRECT USE the “complete mission” of the car (jour- – Travel time (driving time). ney) and “Trip B”, (only available on reconfigurable multifunction display), con- “Trip B” (only available on reconfigurable cerning the partial mission of the car; this multifunction display), displays the figures relating to: WARNING MESSAGES latter function (as shown in fig. 31) is “con- LIGHTS AND tained” within the complete mission. – Trip distance B – Average consumption B

IN AN – Average speed B EMERGENCY – Travel time B (driving time). Note The “Trip B” function can be ex-

CAR cluded (see paragraph “Trip B On/Off”).

MAINTENANCE “Range” cannot be reset. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

36 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 37

Values displayed Average speed TRIP button fig. 30 Range This value shows the car average speed as Button TRIP, set on the top of the right a function of the overall time elapsed since steering column stalk, shall be used (with

Estimated distance which can be travelled ignition key at ON) to display and to re- DASHBOARD

the start of the new mission. AND CONTROLS with the fuel currently in the tank, keep- set the previously described values to start ing the same driving style. The display will Travel time a new mission: show “----” in the following cases: This value shows the time elapsed since – short push to display the different val- SAFETY – value lower than 50 km (or 30 mi) the start of the new mission. ues DEVICES – car left parked with engine running for IMPORTANT Lacking information, Trip – long push to reset and then start a new long. computer values are displayed with “----”. mission. When normal operating condition is re- IMPORTANT The variation of the auton- New mission

set, calculation of different units will OF THE CAR New mission starts after: CORRECT USE omy value can be influenced by different restart regularly. Values displayed before factors: driving style (see what is described the failure will not be reset. – “manual” resetting by the user, by press- in paragraph “Driving style” in the chap- ing the relevant button; ter “Start-up and driving”), type of route – “automatic” resetting, when the “Trip dis- WARNING (highways, urban, mountain, etc…), use MESSAGES tance” reaches 9999.9 km or when the LIGHTS AND conditions of the car (load transported, “Travel time” reaches 99.59 (99 hours and tire pressure, etc…). What was described 59 minutes); previously must be taken in consideration – after disconnecting/reconnecting the when planning a trip. IN AN

battery. EMERGENCY Trip distance This value shows estimated distance covered from the start of the new mission. CAR

Average consumption MAINTENANCE Average fuel consumption since the start of the new mission.

Instant consumption TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS This value shows instant fuel consumption (this value is updated second by second). If parking the car with engine on, the display will show “----”. INDEX

37 001-038 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:06 Pagina 38

IMPORTANT The reset operation in the Start of journey procedure presence of the screens concerning the “General Trip” makes it possible to reset With ignition key at ON, press and keep also the “Trip B”. The reset operation in button TRIP pressed for over 2 seconds DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS the presence of the screens concerning to reset. only the “Trip B” makes it possible to reset only the information associated with SAFETY

DEVICES this function.

fig. 30 F0L0070m OF THE CAR CORRECT USE WARNING MESSAGES Reset GENERAL TRIP LIGHTS AND Reset GENERAL TRIP End of complete mission End of complete mission Start of new mission Start of new mission IN AN ˙ ˙

EMERGENCY GENERAL TRIP

Reset TRIP B TRIP B ˙ CAR Reset TRIP B ˙ ˙ MAINTENANCE TRIP B

Reset TRIP B ˙ TRIP B End of partial mission

TECHNICAL Start of new partial mission ˙ ˙

SPECIFICATIONS End of partial mission Start of new partial mission End of partial mission Reset TRIP B Start of new

INDEX End of partial mission partial mission Start of new fig. 31 partial mission 38 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 39

SEATS WARNING For maximum safety, keep MANUALLY ADJUSTABLE the back of your seat up- DASHBOARD FRONT SEATS fig. 32 right, lean back into it and make sure AND CONTROLS the seat belt fits closely across your chest and hips. Moving the seat backwards SAFETY or forwards DEVICES Lift the lever A and push the seat forwards or backwards: in the driving position the fig. 32 F0L0376m Fabric upholstery of your car arms should rest on the rim of the steer- is purpose-made to withstand ing wheel. common wear resulting from OF THE CAR WARNING normal use of the car. It is CORRECT USE Height adjustment Only make adjustments however absolutely necessary to pre- when the car is stationary. vent hard and/or prolonged scratch- Move repeatedly lever B upwards or ing/scraping caused by clothing acces- WARNING downwards to achieve the required MESSAGES sories like metallic buckles, studs, “Vel- LIGHTS AND height. cro” fixings, etc. that stressing locally IMPORTANT Adjustment must be car- the fabric could break yarns and dam- ried out only seated in the driver’s seat. age the upholstery as a consequence. WARNING IN AN EMERGENCY Back rest angle adjustment Once you have released the lever, check that the seat is Turn the knob C. firmly locked in the runners by trying Lumbar adjustment to move it back and forth. Failure to (where provided) CAR

lock the seat in place could result in MAINTENANCE the seat moving suddenly and the dri- To adjust, turn the knob D. ver losing control of the car. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

39 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 40 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 33 F0L0136m fig. 34 F0L0199m fig. 35 F0L0104m

OF THE CAR Tilting the back rest Seat warming fig. 34 Front passenger’s seat “table” CORRECT USE (where provided) fig. 33 With ignition key at ON, press button F tilting (where provided) fig. 35 Move repeatedly lever E upwards or to switch the seat warming on/off. The led To tilt the seat, lift lever A and fold the downwards to achieve the required po- on the button will light up when the func- back rest at the same time. WARNING MESSAGES tion is on. LIGHTS AND sition. To reset it to normal position, operate IMPORTANT Adjustment must be car- lever A and at the same time raise the ried out only seated in the driver’s seat. back rest until hearing the coupling/locking click. IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

40 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 41

Storing the driver’s seat positions Recalling stored positions The system allows to store and recall Proceed as follows: (only with ignition key at ON) three dif- ❒

turn the ignition key to ON; DASHBOARD

ferent driver’s seat and door mirror po- AND CONTROLS sitions. ❒ press (by pulse) button D (“1” , “2” or Proceed as follows: “3”). SAFETY ❒ adjust the driver’s seat and door mir- The seat will move automatically, only if DEVICES ror positions; the position to be reached is different F0L0173m from the current one and the car speed is fig. 36 ❒ press for about 3 seconds one of the lower than 10 km/h. buttons D (“1” , “2” or “3”), corre- Seat moving is possible within 1 minute af-

ELECTRICALLY ADJUSTABLE sponding to each of the stored posi- OF THE CAR ter removing the key from the ignition CORRECT USE FRONT SEATS tions until hearing the confirmation beep. switch or within three minutes after open- (where provided) fig. 36 ing the doors. Storing a new position (seat and mirror) Adjustment is possible when the ignition Should engine be started during the re- WARNING will automatically clear the one stored MESSAGES key is at ON or within 1 minute with ig- LIGHTS AND previously using the same button. calling phase, seat moving will be tem- nition key at OFF or removed, or for porarily stopped. three minutes after opening the doors. IMPORTANT The lumbar adjustment and the seat warming function are not con- IMPORTANT Pressing any of the D but- Moving the seat backwards or trolled by the seat position storing system. tons during the recalling stage, causes im- IN AN forwards and seat height mediate stop of the function being per- EMERGENCY formed (“antipanic” mode). adjustment

Use control A. Seat warming (where provided) CAR

Use control C to switch seat warming MAINTENANCE Back rest angle adjustment on/off. Seat warming can be adjusted ac- Use control B. cording to four different levels: 0 (off), 1 (min. warming), 2 (average warming), 3

Height adjustment (max. warming). TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Use control A to adjust the height of the front or rear part of the seat. INDEX

41 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 42

HEAD RESTRAINTS

FRONT fig. 38 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS Head restraints are adjustable in height and they lock automatically in the required position. SAFETY DEVICES ❒ to raise: raise the head restraint until hearing the locking click. fig. 37 F0L0009m fig. 38 F0L0010m ❒ to lower: press button A and lower the head restraint.

OF THE CAR REAR SEATS CORRECT USE REAR fig. 39 Releasing the back rest fig. 37 ❒ Rear seats are fitted with three head re- lift lever A or B to release respectively straints. WARNING MESSAGES

LIGHTS AND the left or the right section of the back rest and guide it onto the cushion. To lift out rear head restraints: press at the same time buttons B set on both sides and take them out from the seat back. IN AN

EMERGENCY IMPORTANT Rear seat passengers shall F0L0011m always set the head restraints in the po- fig. 39 WARNING sition of use. Only make adjustments

CAR when the car is stationary. WARNING

MAINTENANCE Remember that the head restraints should be adjusted to support the back of your head and not your neck. Only in this position do they exert their protective action. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

42 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 43

WARNING STEERING WHEEL To optimise head restraint protective action, adjust the The driver can adjust the steering wheel

position both axially and in height. DASHBOARD

seat back upright and keep your head AND CONTROLS as close as possible to the head re- Proceed as follows fig. 40 straint. ❒ release the lever pushing it forwards SAFETY (position 1); DEVICES ❒ adjust the steering wheel as required; fig. 40 F0L0392m ❒ lock the lever pulling it towards the steering wheel (position 2). OF THE CAR

WARNING CORRECT USE Any adjustment of the steering wheel position must be carried out only with the car station- WARNING MESSAGES

ary and the engine turned off. LIGHTS AND

WARNING IN AN

It is absolutely forbidden to EMERGENCY carry out whatever after- market operation involving steering

system or steering column modifica- CAR tions (e.g.: installation of anti-theft device) that could badly affect per- MAINTENANCE formance and safety, cause the lapse of warranty and also result in non- compliance of the car with homologation requirements. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

43 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 44

REARVIEW MIRRORS

DRIVING MIRROR fig. 41 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS The mirror is fitted with a safety device that causes it to be released in the event of a violent crash. SAFETY DEVICES It can be moved using the lever A to two different positions: normal or antiglare. fig. 41 F0L0012m fig. 43 F0L0386m ELECTRO-CHROMIC DRIVING ❒

OF THE CAR to adjust the mirror move the switch

CORRECT USE MIRROR fig. 42 C in the four directions; Certain versions are fitted with automatic antiglare electro-chromic mirror. The Adjust mirrors with car stationary and electro-chromic function is turned on/off handbrake on. Mirror defrosting starts au- WARNING MESSAGES tomatically when switching the heated LIGHTS AND by pressing button ON/OFF in the lower section of the mirror. When this func- rear window on. tion is on, the mirror led will turn on. When engaging reverse, the mirror will al- Storing the “parking” position of

IN AN ways set to daylight colouring. the door mirror on the passenger EMERGENCY fig. 42 F0L0310m side To improve visibility during parking ma- DOOR MIRRORS fig. 43 noeuvres when engaging the reverse gear, CAR Electrical adjustment the driver can adjust/move (and store) the MAINTENANCE passenger door mirror to a position dif- This operation is only possible with igni- ferent from that used during normal run- tion key at ON. ning. Proceed as follows: TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS ❒ use switch B to select the mirror required (left or right); INDEX

44 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 45

To store the required mirror position Recalling the “parking” position of IMPORTANT “Parking” position can on- proceed as follows: the passenger door mirror ly be stored or recalled with ignition key at ON. ❒ engage reverse with car stopped and To recall automatically the “parking” po- DASHBOARD

ignition key to ON; sition of the passenger door mirror, pro- AND CONTROLS ceed as follows: Automatic door mirror ❒ turn selector B (to select the passen- realignment ger door mirror); ❒ engage reverse with car stopped and Each time the ignition key is turned to SAFETY ignition key to ON; DEVICES ❒ use selector C to adjust the passenger ON, door mirrors return automatically to door mirror as required to obtain best ❒ turn selector B to select the passen- the last position set and/or recalled at last position for parking manoeuvres; ger door mirror; the mirror will set removal of the electronic key. ❒ keep one of the seat storing/recalling automatically to the previously stored position. This enables mirror alignment if when

buttons pressed for 3 seconds at least; OF THE CAR

leaving the car parked one of the door CORRECT USE Together with the passenger door mirror If no parking position has been stored, mirrors has been moved manually and/or “parking” position, also the driver seat and when engaging reverse the passenger door accidentally. door mirror positions will be stored. mirror will slightly lower to aid the driver during parking. WARNING MESSAGES The sound of a buzzer confirms that the LIGHTS AND mirror position has been stored. The mirror will automatically return to its original position in the following cases: ❒ 10 seconds after disengaging reverse; IN AN

❒ when the car speed exceeds 10 km/h EMERGENCY in forward gear ; ❒ when turning selector B to neutral position or to driver mirror position. CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

45 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 46

WARNING When driving the mirrors shall always be in position A. DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS SAFETY DEVICES WARNING fig. 44 F0L0015m fig. 45 F0L0387m As the driver’s door mirror is curved, it slightly alters the perception of distance.

OF THE CAR Manual folding fig. 44 Powered folding CORRECT USE When required (for example when the (where provided) fig. 45 mirror causes difficulty in narrow spaces) When required (for example when the it is possible to fold the mirrors moving mirror causes difficulty in narrow spaces) WARNING MESSAGES it from position A to position B. LIGHTS AND it is possible to fold the mirrors by pressing button C. To reset mirrors to driving position, press button C again. IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

46 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 47

HEATING/CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS SAFETY DEVICES OF THE CAR CORRECT USE WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS fig. 46 F0L0359m

1 Fixed side vents - 2 Adjustable side outlets - 3 Fixed upper vent - 4 Fixed central vent - 5 Central swivel vents - 6 Lower vents - INDEX 7 Lower vents for rear seats - 8 Adjustable vents for rear seats. 47 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 48 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 47 F0L0015m fig. 48 F0L0311m fig. 49 F0L0311m

OF THE CAR CENTRAL VENTS fig. 47 SIDE VENTS fig. 48 REAR VENTS fig. 49 CORRECT USE A = Air flow adjusting control C = Air flow adjusting control E = Air flow adjusting control ● = completely closed ● = completely closed ● = completely closed WARNING MESSAGES

LIGHTS AND O = completely open O = completely open O = completely open B = Control for directing air flow. D = Control for directing air flow. F = Control for directing air flow. IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

48 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 49

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM DASHBOARD CONTROLS fig. 50 AND CONTROLS A: air distribution knob; SAFETY B: compressor on/off button; DEVICES C: air temperature knob (mixing warm and cold air); D: MAX-DEF function button (front OF THE CAR window fast defrosting/demisting); CORRECT USE E: air flow control knob; F: heated rear window on/off button; fig. 50 F0L0153m WARNING MESSAGES G: air recirculation on/off button. LIGHTS AND CLIMATIC COMFORT y to demist and defrost the windscreen Knob A directs the air inside the passen- and side front windows;

ger compartment according to five levels: ™ to warm the passenger compartment IN AN M to warm the feet and keep the face and at the same time demist the wind- EMERGENCY cool (“bilevel” function); screen; O N to speed up passenger compartment air flow from central vents and side CAR outlets; warming. MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

49 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 50

WARMING THE PASSENGER QUICK WARMING WINDSCREEN AND FRONT COMPARTMENT Proceed as follows: SIDE WINDOW FAST DEMISTING/DEFROSTING Proceed as follows: ❒ DASHBOARD close all dashboard vents; (MAX-DEF function) AND CONTROLS ❒ turn knob C (pointer on red sector) ❒ turn knob C to red sector; completely to the right; Proceed as follows: ❒ press button G; ❒ ❒ turn knob E to the required speed; turn knob C (pointer on red sector) SAFETY DEVICES ❒ completely to the right; ❒ turn knob E to the required fan speed; move knob A to: ❒ ❒ turn knob A to N. turn the MAX-DEF function on by ™ to warm the feet and at the same pressing button D (button led on); time demist the windscreen; Pressing this button will automatically acti- OF THE CAR CORRECT USE M to warm the feet and convey cooler vate the following functions: air from central vents and dashboard ❒ air distribution to windscreen and side outlets; vents; N ❒

WARNING for quick warming. MESSAGES fan activation at max. speed; LIGHTS AND ❒ compressor activation (button led on); ❒ automatic air recirculation (button led

IN AN off if previously on); EMERGENCY After demisting/defrosting, press button D to turn the MAX-DEF function off. Use common control buttons to restore CAR the required comfort. MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

50 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 51

Window demisting HEATED REAR WINDOW AND RECIRCULATION In the event of considerable outside mois- DOOR MIRROR DEMISTING/ Turn this function on by pressing button ture and/or rain and/or considerable dif- DEFROSTING G (button led on). DASHBOARD

ferences in temperature inside and out- Press button F to start this function. AND CONTROLS side the passenger compartment, perform This function is particularly useful when the following preventive demisting proce- This function is timed and switches off au- the outside air is heavily polluted (in a traf- dure: tomatically after 30 minutes. To cut out fic jam, tunnel, etc.). However, it is bet- SAFETY this function press again button O. ter not to use it for long periods, espe- DEVICES ❒ turn air recirculation off by pressing cially if there are several people in the car button G (button led off); IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on to prevent window misting. the inside of the rear window over the ❒ turn knob C to red sector; heating filaments to avoid damage that IMPORTANT The inside air recirculation ❒ might cause it to stop working properly. system makes it possible to reach the re-

turn knob E to 2; OF THE CAR quired “heating” or “cooling” conditions CORRECT USE ❒ y ™ turn knob A to , or to the win- FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENT faster. Do not use the air recirculation dows do not demist. function on rainy/cold days as it would To ventilate the passenger’s compartment considerably increase the possibility of the IMPORTANT Climate control system is WARNING

properly, proceed as follows: windows misting inside. MESSAGES very useful to speed up window demist- LIGHTS AND ing: therefore, just perform demisting as ❒ open completely central vents and side previously described and turn the climate outlets; control system on by pressing button B. ❒ turn knob C to the blue sector; IN AN ❒ turn knob E to the required speed; EMERGENCY ❒ turn air recirculation off by pressing button G (button led off); CAR ❒ O turn knob A to . MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

51 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 52

CLIMATE CONTROL (cooling) LOOKING AFTER THE SYSTEM AUTOMATIC CLIMATE Proceed as follows: During winter, the climate control system CONTROL SYSTEM ❒ must be turned on at least once a month DASHBOARD turn knob C to the blue sector; (where provided)

AND CONTROLS for about 10 minutes. Before summer, ❒ turn knob E to the required speed; have the system checked at a Fiat Deal- ership. ❒ turn knob A to O; GENERAL SAFETY DEVICES ❒ turn air recirculation on by pressing The car is fitted with a two-zone climate button G (button led on); control system which makes it possible to separately adjust the air temperature on ❒ press button B to turn climate control the driver’s side and on the passenger’s compressor on. side. Temperature control is based on the OF THE CAR

CORRECT USE “equivalent temperature” logic, i.e.: the Cooling adjustment system continuously works to keep constant the comfort inside the passenger Proceed as follows: compartment and to compensate any vari- ❒ ation of the outside climate conditions, in- WARNING MESSAGES turn air recirculation off by pressing LIGHTS AND button G (button led off); cluding sunshine detected by a proper sensor provided for the purpose. ❒ turn knob C to the right to raise temperature; The system is also fitted with AQS (Air IN AN Quality System) sensor that turns on air EMERGENCY ❒ turn knob E to the left to reduce the recirculation automatically when it detects fan speed. the presence of outside polluted air (for example when driving in the city, queues

CAR and tunnels). MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

52 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 53

The climate control system automatically All the above functions can be changed The temperature of the air admitted to controls and adjusts the following para- manually by selecting the required func- the passenger compartment is always con- meters and functions: tion/s and by changing the set parameters. trolled automatically according to the tem- In this way the automatic control is de- peratures set on the driver’s and front ❒ DASHBOARD air temperature at driver/front pas- activated; the system will resume auto- passenger’s display (except when the sys- AND CONTROLS senger/rear passenger vents; matic control only for safety reasons (e.g. tem is off or under certain conditions ❒ air distribution at driver/front passen- risk of window misting up). when the compressor is off). SAFETY ger vents; Manual selections prevail over automatic The following parameters and functions DEVICES ❒ fan speed (continuous air flow varia- ones and remain in storage until the user can be set or changed manually: decides to resume automatic control by tion); ❒ air temperatures on driver/front pas- ❒ pressing the proper button, except when compressor activation (to cool/dehu- the system cuts in for particular safety senger side;

midify air); OF THE CAR conditions. ❒ fan speed (continuous variation); CORRECT USE ❒ air recirculation. The control of functions not changed man- ❒ air distribution on seven levels (dri- ually remains automatic. ver/front passenger side); ❒ WARNING The amount of air admitted to the pas- climate control compressor on/off; MESSAGES LIGHTS AND senger compartment does not depend on ❒ the car speed, since it is electronically con- monozone/two-zone distribution pri- trolled by the fan. ority;

❒ fast demisting/defrosting; IN AN ❒ air recirculation; EMERGENCY ❒ rear heated window. CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

53 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 54

CONTROLS A: air recirculation and AQS function on/off button DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS B: air distribution button on driver side C: button for selecting the system automatic mode AUTO on driver side SAFETY DEVICES D: display showing climate control system data E: button for selecting the system automatic mode AUTO on passenger side OF THE CAR CORRECT USE F: air distribution button on passenger side G: knob for adjusting temperature on fig. 51 F0L0380m WARNING MESSAGES

LIGHTS AND passenger side H: rear window heating on/off button SWITCHING THE CLIMATE This way the system will start working CONTROL SYSTEM ON completely automatically to reach the I: button for activating the MONO comfort temperatures as quickly as pos-

IN AN function (alignment of set tempera- The system can be started in different sible. The system will set air temperature, EMERGENCY tures) ways, but it is advisable to press one of the quantity and distribution and it will con- AUTO buttons and then to turn the trol the air recirculation function and the L: climate control compressor on/off knobs to set the temperatures required activation of conditioner compressor. button on the display. CAR M/N: buttons for adjusting fan speed Since the system controls two zone of the MAINTENANCE O: MAX-DEF function button (front passenger’s compartment, the driver and window fast defrosting/demisting the front passenger can select different temperatures. P: knob for adjusting temperature on dri- TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS ver side INDEX

54 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 55

During fully automatic operation, the on- During full automatic system operation, CONTROLS ly manual settings required are the fol- you can change at any time set tempera- lowing: tures, air distribution and fan speed by us- Air temperature adjusting ing the relevant buttons or knobs: the sys- ❒ knobs P-G DASHBOARD MONO, to align the air temperature tem will automatically change its settings AND CONTROLS and distribution set on the passenger’s to adjust to the new requirements. Dur- Turning the knobs clockwise or counter- side (front or rear) with that on the ing FULL AUTO operation, changing air clockwise, respectively highers or lowers driver’s side; the temperature of the air required re- distribution and/or flow and/or compres- SAFETY DEVICES ❒ ï, air recirculation, to keep it always sor activation and/or air recirculation will spectively in the front left zone (knob P) on or off; make the FULL wording disappear. In this or in the right zone (knob G) of the pas- way functions will pass from automatic senger compartment. ❒ -, to speed up demisting/defrosting control to manual control until pressing Since the system controls two zones of of windscreen, front side windows, again the AUTO button. Fan speed is the OF THE CAR rear window and door mirrors; the passenger compartment, it is possi- CORRECT USE same for every area of the passenger com- ble to personalise required temperatures ❒ (, to demist/defrost heated rear win- partment. (driver and passenger). dow and door mirrors. With one or more functions engaged man- The temperatures set are shown on the ually, the adjustment of the temperature WARNING MESSAGES

displays near the relevant knobs. LIGHTS AND of the air admitted to the passenger compartment continues to be controlled au- Pressing button I (MONO ) automatical- tomatically by the system, except with the ly aligns the temperature on the passen- climate control compressor off: under this ger’s side with that on the driver’s side; IN AN

condition in fact, the temperature of the you can therefore set the same tempera- EMERGENCY air admitted to the passenger compart- ture for both zones by turning knob P on ment cannot be lower than outside air driver side. temperature.

Separate operation of air temperatures CAR and distribution is restored by turning knobs or pressing again button I MAINTENANCE (MONO) when the button led is on. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

55 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 56

Turning the knobs fully clockwise or To switch the function off, simply turn the Front air distribution buttons B-F counter-clockwise until they reach the ex- knob counter-clockwise and set the re- treme selections HI or LO, the maximum quired temperature. Pressing these buttons it is possible to heating or cooling functions are respec- choose manually one of the seven possi- DASHBOARD ❒ AND CONTROLS tively engaged: LO function (highest cooling power): ble air distributions to the passenger compartment (right or left side): ❒ HI function (highest heating power): this is turned on by rotating the temperature knob counter-clockwise and passing ▲ Air flow to the windscreen and front SAFETY DEVICES this is turned on by rotating the temper- the min. temperature value (16°C). It can side window vents to demist or de- ature knob clockwise and passing the max. be activated independently from driver or frost them. temperature value (32°C). It can be acti- front passenger side or both (also when vated independently from driver or front the MONO function is selected). ˙ Air flow at central and side dash- passenger side or both (also when the board vents to ventilate the chest MONO function is selected). When this function is on, the display OF THE CAR and the face during the hot season. CORRECT USE shows LO. When this function is on, the display ▼ Air flow towards the front and rear shows HI. This function can be engaged when requiring to cool the passenger compart- lower parts of the passenger com- This function can be engaged when re- ment as quickly as possible, exploiting the partment. Due to the natural ten- WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND quiring to heat the passenger compart- maximum potential of the system. This dency of heat to spread upwards, ment as quickly as possible, exploiting the function activates automatically: this type of distribution allows heat- maximum potential of the system. This ❒ MONO function; ing of the passenger compartment function uses the maximum temperature in the shortest time, also giving a IN AN of the coolant fluid, while air distribution ❒ air distribution at central / side vents

EMERGENCY prompt feeling of warmth. and fan speed are controlled according to (shown by the relevant symbol on the the system settings. display); ˙ Splitting of the air flow between the More particularly, max. fan speed will not ❒ fan at max. speed; ▼ CAR vents to the lower part of the pas- be immediately engaged if coolant is not ❒ senger compartment (warmest air) MAINTENANCE hot enough; this to prevent admitting air climate control compressor. and the dashboard centre and side that is not warm enough to the passenger All manual settings are possible with this compartment. outlets (coolest air). This air flow function on. distribution is particularly useful in All manual settings are possible with this

TECHNICAL To switch the function off, simply turn the spring and autumn when the sun is

SPECIFICATIONS function on. knob clockwise and set the required tem- shining. perature. INDEX

56 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 57

▲ ▼ Splitting of the air flow between the windscreen and side window demisting/defrosting vents and the

lower part of the passenger com- DASHBOARD partment. This type of air distrib- AND CONTROLS ution allows satisfactory heating of the passenger compartment while SAFETY preventing possible misting of the DEVICES windows.

F0L0234m ▲˙ Combined splitting of the air flow fig. 52 ▼ between the windscreen vents, Air distribution is selected through but- In FULL AUTO mode, pressing the dis- OF THE CAR central/side outlets and vents at tons B and F in “rolling” mode, according tribution buttons B or F for the first time, CORRECT USE the lower part of the passenger to the sequence shown in the following di- will display the current status selected by compartment (feet area). This air agram fig. 52. the system. It is then possible to select in flow distribution enables to keep “rolling” mode the type of distribution re- WARNING The type of air distribution selected is MESSAGES quired by pressing buttons B or F again. LIGHTS AND good overall comfort conditions in shown by lighting up of the relevant sym- summer. bols on the display. When the driver selects air distribution to the windscreen, also the air distribu- To restore automatic air distribution con-

▲ tion on passenger side will be distributed IN AN Splitting of the air flow between trol after a manual selection, press button ˙ to the windscreen. The passenger can EMERGENCY the windscreen vents, central/side AUTO. outlets on the dashboard. This air however select the required air distribu- flow distribution enables to obtain tion by pressing the relevant buttons.

satisfactory cooling of the passen- CAR

ger’s compartment and to keep the MAINTENANCE required coolig condition in summer. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

57 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 58

Fan speed adjusting buttons M/N IMPORTANT Should the system (after p p manual settings) be no longer able to guar- Press buttons + or – to increase or antee the required temperature set in the to decrease the fan speed and therefore passenger compartment, the set tempera- DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS the amount of air admitted into the pas- ture value will start flashing to indicate this senger compartment. condition, after one minute the AUTO The fan speed is shown by the lit bars on message will turn off. SAFETY DEVICES the display To restore system automatic control at ❒ max fan speed = all bars lit any time, after one or more manual ad- F0L0235m justments, press button AUTO. ❒ min fan speed = one bar lit. fig. 53 The fan can be cut off only if the cli- MONO button

OF THE CAR AUTO buttons CORRECT USE mate control compressor has been (automatic operation) C-E (to align set temperatures switched off pressing button B. and air distribution) I IMPORTANT To restore automatic Pressing the AUTO button (on driver and/or front passenger side) the system Pressing button MONO automatically fan speed control after a manual ad- aligns the temperature on the passenger WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND justment, press button AUTO. automatically adjusts the amount and distribution of the air admitted to the pas- side with that on the driver side, it is there- Pressing again button p– after min fan senger compartment, cancelling all the fore possible to set the same temperature speed will turn the system off. previous manual adjustments. and air distribution between the two zones by turning the knob on driver side. This IN AN The display will show and the air re- This condition is indicated by the message

EMERGENCY OFF function is provided to simplify tempera- circulation condition fig. 53. FULL AUTO on the front system dis- ture adjustment of the whole passenger play. compartment when only the driver is on- board. Separate operation of set temper- CAR Manual operation of at least one automatic ature and air distribution is restored by function (air recirculation, air distribution,

MAINTENANCE turning knob P or G (to set temperature fan speed or climate control compressor on front passenger side) or by pressing off) will cause FULL message going off the again button MONO, when the wording display. This means that automatic control is shown on the display. is not complete (except temperature con- TECHNICAL trol which is always automatic). SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

58 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 59

Air recirculation and AQS function WARNING the presence of polluted air, for example on/off button A when driving in the city, queues and tun- It is inadvisable to use the in- nels. If the AQS sensor is not fitted, air recir- side air recirculation func- DASHBOARD

culation works according to the following tion with low outside temperature as With compressor on, in order to prevent AND CONTROLS operating logics: windows may mist over quickly. polluted air (exhaust gas) inlet at stops, the ❒ system will stop air recirculation when the forced switching on (inside air recir- car speed falls below 6 km/h. As the car SAFETY culation always on), indicated by sym- DEVICES í speed increases (over 25 km/h), the sys- bol on the display; tem will restore the previous automatic ❒ forced switching off (air recirculation operating conditions. always off with air inlet from the out- It is however inadvisable to use it on In automatic operation, AQS is deacti- side), indicated by symbol êon the rainy/cold days as it would considerably in- vated when outside temperature is below OF THE CAR display. crease the possibility of the windows mist- 3°C, the system will activate air recircu- CORRECT USE The above operating conditions are ob- ing inside, especially if the climate control lation (indicated by symbol ≥on the tained by pressing in sequence the air re- system is off. display). The user can however set it man- circulation button A. When outside temperature is below 3°C, ually by operating in rolling mode the reir- WARNING MESSAGES culation button: pressing the button for LIGHTS AND Due to safety reasons, after long recircu- recirculation is forced to off (outside air inlet) to prevent window misting up. the first time will display the current relation activation (over 25 minutes), the circulation condition, indicated by symbol system will deactivate automatically air re- It will be reactivated automatically if out- ê.

circulation for 60 seconds to enable outside temperature becomes higher than 5 IN AN side air inlet. °C. It will be reactivated automatically if out- EMERGENCY side temperature becomes higher than 5 IMPORTANT The inside air recirculation The AQS sensor (Air Quality System) in °C. system makes it possible to reach the re- addition to the above operating logics, en-

quired heating or cooling conditions faster. ables to control recirculation automati- Press the button again to select the re- CAR quired recirculation condition, indicated

cally according to the quality of outside air: MAINTENANCE by the corresponding symbol on the dis- ❒ automatic control indicated by symbol play. Under these conditions manual ac- ≥on the display. tivation of the AQS function could cause window misting up.

In this event the display will show symbol TECHNICAL ïor ñaccording to actual recircu- When air recirculation is set manually, SPECIFICATIONS lation operating conditions (on or off). wording FULL will turn off and A will dis- In automatic operation with AQS, inside appear from the recirculation symbol on air recirculation is turned on automatical- the display. INDEX ly when the antipollution sensor detects 59 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 60

Climate control compressor on/off The switching off of the climate control Fast window demisting/defrosting button L compressor remains in storage even when button O the engine has been stopped. Pressing button √ when the symbol is dis- Press this button: the climate control sys- DASHBOARD

AND CONTROLS played will deactivate the climate control To restore automatic control for switch- tem will automatically switch on all the system compressor. Pressing the button ing on the climate control compressor, functions required for fast windscreen and when the symbol is not displayed will re- press again button √ or press button AU- front side window demisting/defrosting, sume automatic control of compressor ac- TO. that is: SAFETY DEVICES tivation; this condition is indicated by the With climate control compressor off if ❒ relevant symbol on the display. switches on climate control compres- outside temperature is higher than the set sor when climatic conditions are suit- When turning the compressor off, the sys- one the system will not be able to keep able; tem will deactivate air recirculation to pre- the required condition, the temperature ❒ value will then start to flash on the display air recirculation off;

OF THE CAR vent window misting up. Although the sys- CORRECT USE tem is able to keep the required temper- for a few seconds and wording AUTO ❒ maximum air temperature (HI) on ature, the wording FULL will disappear will then go off. both areas; from the display. If the system is no longer With climate control compressor off, the ❒ able to keep the required temperature, activates proper fan speed according WARNING

MESSAGES fan speed can be set to zero manually.

LIGHTS AND to engine coolant temperature to lim- temperature value will flash and the word- With compressor on and engine running, ing AUTO will disappear from the display. it the flow into the passenger com- the fan speed cannot be lower that one partment of air not warm enough to IMPORTANT With the climate control bar on the display. demist the windows;

IN AN compressor off, it is not possible to admit Compressor will be disabled automatical- ❒ directs air flow to windscreen and EMERGENCY air to the passenger compartment with a ly with outside temperature below – 1°C. front side windows vents; temperature below the outside tempera- Under this condition symbol √ on the dis- ture; moreover, under certain environ- play will flash for 10 seconds and then go ❒ turns heated rear window on. mental conditions, windows could mist up CAR off. fastly since air is not dehumidified. IMPORTANT Fast demisting/defrosting

MAINTENANCE It will be re-enabled automatically with function stays on for about 3 minutes, outside temperature higher than + 1°C. since engine coolant temperature exceeds 50°C. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

60 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 61

When the max. demisting/defrosting func- Heated rear window and door ADDITIONAL HEATER tion is on, the button led and the heated mirror demisting/defrosting (Multijet versions) rear window button led are on. FULL button H AUTO wording on the display is off. This device enables quick warming up of DASHBOARD

Press this button to activate heated rear the passenger’s compartment in cold en- AND CONTROLS When the max. demisting/defrosting func- window demisting/defrosting. When this vironmental conditions. tion is on, the only manual operations pos- function is on, the button led is on. sible are manual adjustment of the fan The additional heater will switch on au- SAFETY speed and switching heated rear window This function is timed and switches off automatically after turning the ignition key DEVICES off. tomatically after about 20 minutes or by to ON. pressing again the button or by turning the With max. demisting/defrosting function IMPORTANT The additional heater engine off. It will not be switched on au- works only with outside temperature be- on, the fan works according to the previ- tomatically when restarting the engine. ously set air distribution in order to guar- low 12°C, engine coolant temperature be- OF THE CAR antee top climatic comfort under what- IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers on low 50°C and car battery voltage over CORRECT USE ever condition. the inside of the rear window over the 10.25 V. heating filaments to avoid damage that Pressing the max. demisting/defrosting IMPORTANT Do not park the car over might cause it to stop working properly. flammable material such as paper, dry WARNING

button or the air distribution buttons or MESSAGES operating the temperature knobs, the sys- grass or leaves: fire danger. LIGHTS AND tem switches off the max. demisting/defrosting function and restores the operat-

ing conditions of the system prior to func- IN AN

tion activation. EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

61 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 62

EXTERNAL LIGHTS

The left-hand stalk controls the external

DASHBOARD lights and the direction indicators. AND CONTROLS The external lights can only be switched on when the ignition key is at ON. SAFETY DEVICES LIGHTS SWITCHED OFF fig. 54 Knurled ring at å. fig. 54 F0L0021m fig. 57 F0L0024m

SIDELIGHTS fig. 55

OF THE CAR MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS fig. 57 CORRECT USE 6 Turn the knurled ring to . When the knurled ring is at 2, pull the The warning light 3 on the instrument lever towards the steering wheel (2nd un- panel will turn on. stable position). WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND The warning light 1 on the instrument DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS panel will turn on. fig. 56 To turn the main beams off, pull again the

IN AN Turn the knurled ring to 2. lever towards the steering wheel (dipped

EMERGENCY F0L0022m beams will turn on again). The warning light 3 on the instrument fig. 55 panel will turn on. CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

fig. 56 F0L0023m INDEX

62 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 63

“Lane change” function If you want the indicator to flash briefly to show that you are about to change lane, DASHBOARD

move the left stalk to unstable position for AND CONTROLS less than one second. The direction indicator of the side selected will flash 3 times and then it will turn off automatically. SAFETY DEVICES “Cornering lights” fig. 58 F0L0025m fig. 59 F0L0026m (where provided) With low beams on at a speed of less than

FLASHING THE HEADLIGHTS DIRECTION INDICATORS fig. 59 OF THE CAR

40 km/h, when the steering wheel is CORRECT USE fig. 58 Push the lever to (stable) position: turned through a large angle or upon activation of the direction indicator, a light Pull the lever towards the steering wheel ❒ up (position 1): to turn the right-hand (1st unstable position) regardless of the (incorporated in the fog lamp) will come direction indicator on; on to expand the angle of night-time visi- WARNING MESSAGES

position of the knurled ring. The warning LIGHTS AND light 1 on the instrument panel will turn ❒ bility on the side to which the vehicle is down (position 2): to turn the left- turned. on. hand direction indicator on. Warning light F or D will come on flash- IN AN

ing on the instrument panel. EMERGENCY Indicators are switched off automatically when the steering wheel is straightened. CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

63 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 64

F0L1150i DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS

Each time the stalk is operated, the 3 warning light turns on together with the SAFETY DEVICES message on the display (see section “Warning lights and messages”). The fig. 60 F0L0027m warning light will come on the first time fig. 61 F0L0028m the stalk is operated and it will stay on until the function is automatically deactivat-

OF THE CAR “FOLLOW ME HOME” DEVICE Activation fig. 61 CORRECT USE ed. Each single movement of the stalk will This function allows the illumination of the only extend the staying on of the lights. Turn the knurled ring to 2A : in this way, space in front of the car for a preset pe- the automatic activation of the side/tail- riod of time. Deactivation lights and dipped beam headlights is si- WARNING MESSAGES multaneously enabled according to the ex- LIGHTS AND Activation fig. 60 Keep the stalk pulled towards the steer- ternal luminosity. ing wheel for more than 2 seconds. With the ignition key at OFF or removed, Deactivation

IN AN pull the stalk towards the steering wheel AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS

EMERGENCY and operate it within 2 minutes from when SENSOR (daylight sensor) As a result of the sensor control, the the engine is turned off. dipped beam headlights will switch off and, (where provided) after about 10 seconds, sidelights will At each single movement of the stalk, the It detects the changes of the external light switch off too. CAR staying on of the lights is extended by 30 intensity of the car according to the light seconds up to a maximum of 210 seconds; The sensor is not able to detect the fog MAINTENANCE sensitivity set: the greater the sensitivity then the lights are switched off automati- is, the smaller the amount of external light presence, lights shall therefore be cally. necessary to control the switching-on of switched on manually. the external headlights will be. The day-

TECHNICAL light sensor sensitivity can be adjusted by SPECIFICATIONS the “Set-up menu” of the display. INDEX

64 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 65

WINDOW WASHING

WINDSCREEN WASHER/ DASHBOARD WIPER AND CONTROLS This device can only work when the ignition key is at ON. SAFETY DEVICES The right stalk can be moved to five different positions fig. 62: fig. 63 F0L0031m A: windscreen wiper off

B: flick wipe. OF THE CAR Never use the window wiper CORRECT USE With the stalk in position B, turning the to remove ice or snow from knurled ring F four possible intermittent the windscreen. In these con- speeds are obtained: ditions, the wiper is submitted WARNING MESSAGES , to excessive effort that results in mo- LIGHTS AND = very slow intermittent tor protection cutting in and wiper op- — = slow intermittent eration inhibition for few seconds as a consequence. If operation is not re- —- = intermittent medium stored contact Fiat Dealership. IN AN —— = fast intermittent fig. 62 F0L0030m EMERGENCY C: continuous slow; “Smart washing” function Operation in position E is limited to the Pulling the stalk towards the steering D: continuous fast; CAR time the stalk is held in this position. wheel (unstable position) operates the E: fast temporary (unstable position). When the lever is released, it returns to windscreen washer fig. 63. MAINTENANCE position A automatically stopping the wiper. Keeping the stalk pulled for more than half a second, with just one movement it is IMPORTANT Replace wiper blades as possible to operate the washer jet and the TECHNICAL

specified in section “Car maintenance”. wiper at the same time. SPECIFICATIONS The wiper stops working four strokes after releasing the stalk. A further stroke after five seconds com- INDEX pletes the wiping operation. 65 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 66

RAIN SENSOR (where provided) Deactivation fig. 64 The rain sensor is located behind the dri- Move the stalk off B or turn the ignition ving mirror in contact with the windscreen key to OFF. DASHBOARD

AND CONTROLS and has the purpose of automatically adjust, during the intermittent operation, the At next engine starting (key at ON), the frequency of the windscreen wiper sensor will not be reactivated even if the strokes as to the rain intensity. stalk is at B. In this event, to activate the SAFETY

DEVICES rain sensor you have to move the stalk IMPORTANT Keep clean the glass in the to A or C and then again to B or turn the sensor area. knurled ring. Rain sensor activation will be indicated by Activation fig. 64 at least one wiper “stroke” even if the OF THE CAR CORRECT USE Move the right-hand stalk downwards by windscreen is dry. one position (B). The rain sensor is able to recognize and The activation of the rain sensor is sig- automatically adjust itself in the presence nalled by a control acquisition “stroke”. of the following particular conditions: WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND Turning the knurled ring F it is possible to ❒ impurities on the controlled surface increase the sensitivity of the rain sensor. (salt, dirt, etc.); ❒ difference between day and night. IN AN

EMERGENCY fig. 64 F0L0030m

The increase of the sensitivity of the rain CAR sensor is signalled by a control and acqui-

MAINTENANCE sition “cycle”. WARNING Operating the windscreen washer with Streaks of water may cause the rain sensor activated the normal wash- unrequired blade moving. ing cycle is performed at the end of which TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS the rain sensor resumes its normal automatic function. INDEX

66 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 67

REAR WINDOW WASHER/ HEADLIGHT WASHER Never use the rear window WIPER (where provided) wiper to remove ice or snow Operation is only obtained with ignition Headlight washers are “retractable”, i.e.: from the rear window. In DASHBOARD

key at ON. they are located inside the front bumpers these conditions, the wiper is AND CONTROLS submitted to excessive effort that re- å ' and they are activated when (with dipped Turning the knurled ring A from to beams on) the windscreen washer is op- sults in motor protection cutting in and will operate the rear window wiper as fol- erated. wiper operation inhibition for few sec- SAFETY lows: onds as a consequence. If operation is DEVICES ❒ IMPORTANT Check at regular intervals not restored contact Fiat Dealership. intermittent operation if the wind- correct operation and cleanness of noz- screen wiper is off; zles. ❒ synchronised with the windscreen OF THE CAR

wiper (but with half stroke frequency). CORRECT USE With windscreen wiper on and reverse gear engaged, rear window wiping will be continuous. WARNING MESSAGES Pushing the stalk towards the dashboard LIGHTS AND (unstable position) will activate the rear window washer.

Keeping the stalk pushed for over half a IN AN second will activate also the rear window EMERGENCY wiper. Releasing the stalk will activate the smart washing function as described for the CAR

windscreen wiper. MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

67 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 68

CRUISE CONTROL TO MEMORISE SPEED (where provided) Proceed as follows: ❒

DASHBOARD turn the knurled ring A to ON and AND CONTROLS It is a device able to support the driver, press the accelerator pedal to the re- with electronic control, which allows dri- quired speed; ving at speed over 30 km/h on long and straight dry roads (e.g.: motorways), at a ❒ move the stalk upwards (+) for at least SAFETY DEVICES desired speed, without pressing the ac- one second, then release it. The car celerator pedal. Therefore it is not sug- speed is memorised and it is therefore gested to use this device on extra-urban fig. 65 F0L0033m possible to release the accelerator roads with traffic. Do not use it in town. pedal.

OF THE CAR DEVICE ENGAGEMENT fig. 65 In the case of need (when overtaking for CORRECT USE instance) acceleration is possible simply Turn knurled ring A to ON. pressing the accelerator pedal: releasing The Cruise Control cannot be engaged the accelerator pedal, the car will return in first or reverse gear. It is advisable to to the speed memorised previously. WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND engage it in 4th or higher gears. Travelling downhill with the device en- TO RESET THE MEMORISED gaged, the car speed may increase more SPEED

IN AN than the memorised one. If the device has been disengaged for ex- EMERGENCY When the device is activated the warn- ample pressing the brake or clutch pedal, ing light Ü turns on together with the rel- the memorised speed can be reset as fol- evant message on the instrument panel. lows: CAR ❒ accelerate gradually until reaching a

MAINTENANCE speed approaching the one memorised; ❒ engage the gear selected at the time of speed memorising; TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ❒ press the RES B button. INDEX

68 039-069 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:03 Pagina 69

TO INCREASE THE MEMORISED DEVICE DISENGAGEMENT The device is automatically deactivated in one of the following cases: SPEED The device can be disengaged in the fol- The speed memorised can be increased in lowing ways: ❒ ABS or ESP system cut-in; DASHBOARD two ways: ❒ turning the knurled ring A to OFF; ❒ system failure. AND CONTROLS ❒ pressing the accelerator and then ❒ turning the engine off; memorising the new speed reached;

❒ SAFETY pressing the brake pedal or engaging DEVICES or the hand brake; ❒ moving the stalk upwards (+). ❒ pressing the clutch pedal; WARNING When travelling with the de- Each operation of the stalk will corre- ❒ shifting gear with automatic transmis- spond to a slight increase in speed (about vice on, never set the

sion in sequential mode; OF THE CAR 1 km/h), while keeping the stalk upwards gearshift lever to neutral. CORRECT USE will correspond to a continuous speed in- ❒ with car speed below the preset lim- crease. it; ❒ pressing the accelerator pedal; in this WARNING MESSAGES TO REDUCE MEMORISED LIGHTS AND case the system is not really disen- WARNING SPEED gaged but the request for acceleration In the event of device mal- The speed memorised can be increased in takes priority over the system. The cruise control is however active and it function or failure, turn the two ways: IN AN will not be necessary to press button knurled ring A to OFF and contact a EMERGENCY ❒ disengaging the device and then mem- RES to resume previous conditions Fiat Dealership after checking the orising the new speed; after ending acceleration. protection fuse integrity. or CAR ❒ moving the stalk downwards (–) until MAINTENANCE reaching the new speed which will be memorised automatically. Each operation of the stalk will correspond to a slight reduction in speed (about TECHNICAL 1 km/h), while keeping the stalk down- SPECIFICATIONS wards will correspond to a continuous speed reduction. INDEX

69 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 70

CEILING LIGHTS

FRONT CEILING LIGHTS fig. 66 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS Courtesy lights Press the lens on point A to turn on/off SAFETY DEVICES the driver’s courtesy light or press the lens on point C to turn on/off the passenger’s courtesy light. fig. 66 F0L0105m fig. 67 F0L0106m With ignition key at OFF or removed, the

OF THE CAR ceiling light will stay on for about 15 min- Central light REAR CEILING LIGHTS fig. 67 CORRECT USE utes, then it is automatically switched off. It turns on automatically when opening a To turn these lights on/off, press the lens door and it will turn off when closing the on point D. door, about 10 seconds later. WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND If the door is left open, the light goes off after about 3 minutes. Central light can also be turned on/off by

IN AN pressing the lens on point B; rear side

EMERGENCY lights will turn on at the same time. Light turning on/off is gradual.

CAR After switching on by button B, if the key is at OFF or removed, the ceiling light MAINTENANCE stays on for about 15 minutes, then it is automatically switched off. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

70 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 71

CONTROLS

HAZARD LIGHTS fig. 68 DASHBOARD They turn on pressing the button A, re- AND CONTROLS gardless of the position of the ignition key. When the function is active, warning lights SAFETY Î and ¥ on the panel blink. DEVICES To switch off, press again the button A. fig. 68 F0L0034m fig. 69 F0L0035m The use of hazard lights is governed by the Highway Code of the country you are in.

Emergency braking FRONT FOG LIGHTS OF THE CAR

Keep to the rules. CORRECT USE In the event of emergency braking the (where provided) fig. 69 emergency lights automatically turn on and To turn front fog lights on, press button at the same time the lights Î end ¥ turn 5, to activate these lights it is necessary WARNING

on on the dashboard. MESSAGES

to have the side/taillights switched on. LIGHTS AND The function automatically turns off when Warning light 5 on the instrument pan- the emergency braking stops. el will turn on. This function complies with the current ap- plicable laws. Press the button again to turn the light off. IN AN EMERGENCY

WARNING E CURA

The use of hazard lights is MANUTENZIONE governed by the Road Traf- fic Code of the country you are in. Keep to the rules. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

71 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 72

POWER SUPPLY AND FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH The car is fitted with a safety switch that DASHBOARD

AND CONTROLS in the event of a crash comes into operation by cutting off fuel and turning off the engine as a consequence. Certain versions are equipped with an additional safety SAFETY DEVICES switch that in the event of a crash comes into operation by cutting off the power sup- fig. 70 F0L0230m fig. 71 F0L0036m ply. These two safety switches therefore prevent dangerous fuel leaks due to fuel line cracking and sparks or electric discharges

OF THE CAR REAR FOG LIGHT fig. 70 PARKING LIGHTS fig. 71 CORRECT USE due to damaging or malfunctioning of the To turn rear fog light on, press button 4, These lights can only be turned on with ig- electric components of the car in the event to activate this light it is necessary to have nition key at OFF or removed, by press- of a crash. the dipped beams switched on. ing button A for about 1 second, warn- IMPORTANT After a crash, remember to

WARNING 3 MESSAGES ing light on the instrument panel will LIGHTS AND 4 remove the key from the ignition device Warning light on the instrument panel turn on. will turn on. to prevent battery run-down. With parking lights on, moving the left If, after a crash no fuel leaks or damages Press the button again to turn the light off. stalk upwards (position 1) or downwards

IN AN to the electric devices (e.g. headlights) are (position 2) will turn on respectively the EMERGENCY found and the car can be started again, re- right or left sidelights; the warning light will set the fuel cut-off switch and the power go off. supply cut-off switch (where provided). Moving the left stalk back to central po- Follow the instructions given below. CAR sition will turn on all side/taillights and al- MAINTENANCE so the warning light 3. Press the button again to turn the lights off. WARNING TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS If, after a crash, you smell fuel or see leaks from the fuel system, do not reset the switches to

INDEX avoid fire risk.

72 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 73 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 72 F0L0107m fig. 73 F0L0308m fig. 74 F0L0307m

Resetting the fuel cut-off switch To reset the power supply cut-off switch, OF THE CAR WARNING CORRECT USE fig. 72 proceed as follows: Before resetting the fuel cut- To reset the fuel cut-off switch, press but- ❒ press button A to reset the fuel cut- off switch carefully inspect ton A. off switch; the car for fuel leaks or damages to WARNING MESSAGES ❒ open the bonnet; electric devices (e.g. headlights). LIGHTS AND Resetting the power supply cut-off ❒ switch (where provided) fig. 73-74 operate the retaining clips B and remove the protection cover C; The switch is located inside the fuse box ❒ IN AN at battery positive terminal. press button D to reset the power EMERGENCY supply. Sunroof, sun visor (where provided) and power window

initialisation CAR

WARNING After resetting the safety switches, the MAINTENANCE Before resetting the power sunroof, sun visor and power window op- supply cut-off switch care- eration shall be re-initialised. For the rel- fully inspect the car for fuel leaks or evant procedures, refer to paragraphs

damages to electric devices (e.g. “Sunroof” and “Power windows”, in this TECHNICAL headlights). section. SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

73 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 74

INTERIOR FITTINGS

FRONT ARMREST WITH DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS ODDMENT COMPARTMENT AND REFRIGERATED COMPARTMENT SAFETY DEVICES Press lever A-fig. 75 to raise the front armrest and reach a first oddment/mobile phone compartment. fig. 75 F0L0527m fig. 76 F0L0375m Lift cover B-fig. 75 to reach a second

OF THE CAR compartment that is warmed/cooled by Move lever E-fig. 77 as shown by the ar- CORRECT USE an air outlet D-fig. 77 connected to the row to open the outlet and to make climate control system. cool/warm air come into the compartment. Note For direct access to the heated/ WARNING MESSAGES If the two-zone climate control system is LIGHTS AND cooled compartment, lift the arm without pressing the lever A-fig. 75. Hold it on the fitted, the temperature of this compart- side areas at point C as shown in fig. 75. ment will be the same as that on passenger side. IN AN

EMERGENCY fig. 77 F0L0528m

When the armrest is fully raised, take care CAR not to press button A-fig. 75, accidentally

MAINTENANCE to avoid opening the oddment compartment cover and the falling of the objects contained as a consequence. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

74 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 75 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 78 F0L0037m fig. 79 F0L0108m fig. 81 F0L0038m

REAR ARMREST (where provided) GLOVEBOX fig. 81 OF THE CAR CORRECT USE To use the rear armrest A-fig. 78, low- To open the glovebox move the handle as er it as shown in the figure. shown by the arrow. The rear armrest can be fitted (where When the glovebox is opened, an interi- WARNING MESSAGES provided) with two glass/can holders. To or courtesy light comes on. LIGHTS AND use them pull tab B-fig. 79 in arrow direction. IN AN

fig. 80 F0L0109m EMERGENCY

Inside the armrest, after lifting the cover, there is an oddment compartment fig. 80. CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

75 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 76 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 82 F0L0039m fig. 83 F0L0053m fig. 84 F0L0040m

OF THE CAR ODDMENT COMPARTMENT EYEGLASSES HOLDER CIGAR LIGHTER CORRECT USE fig. 82 (where provided) fig. 83 (where provided) fig.84 It is located on the central console under It is located on the roof panel near the It is located on the central console, at the the front armrest. handle on the driver side. side of the handbrake lever. WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND Use it as shown in the figure. Press button A to switch on the cigar GLASS/CAN HOLDERS lighter with ignition key at ON. SMOKER’S KIT They are located on the front console. One purple chrysanthemum grew up part- After about 15 seconds the button will re- IN AN ly drunkenly. The Macintoshes laughed turn to its initial position and is ready for EMERGENCY COINS BOX fig. 82 quite easily. Five silly aardvarks towed the use. It is located on the central console, at the bourgeois fountain. Five silly dogs tastes IMPORTANT Always check that the cig- side of the handbrake lever. umpteen poisons. The botulisms marries ar lighter has turned off. CAR purple wart hogs, even though five d

MAINTENANCE The electric socket only works with the ignition key turned to ON. To use it, open the protective cover. WARNING The cigar lighter gets very TECHNICAL hot. Handle it with care and SPECIFICATIONS make sure that it is not used by children: danger of fire and/or burns. INDEX

76 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 77 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 85 F0L0110m fig. 87 F0L0041m fig. 88 F0L0042m

SUN VISORS fig. 87 CURRENT OUTLET fig. 88 OF THE CAR CORRECT USE These are positioned to the sides of the The current outlet only works with igni- rear-view mirror. They can swing to the tion key at ON and it is located beneath sides and up or down. the central air vents for rear seats. WARNING MESSAGES On the back of the visor (driver and pas- Open protection cover A to use it. LIGHTS AND senger side) there are two courtesy mirrors. The passenger side mirror and on some versions also the driver side mirror, are lighted in order to allow their use even IN AN fig. 86 F0L0111m in poor lighting conditions. EMERGENCY Open cover A to use the mirror. ASHTRAY (where provided) The passenger’s sun visor also carries the CAR The central console houses an ashtray,

symbols and the message concerning the MAINTENANCE raise lid A-fig. 85 to use it. correct use of the child restraint system To empty the ashtray, remove the inner with passenger’s air bag (for further in- box. formation see paragraph “Passenger’s

front Air bag” in section “Safety devices”). TECHNICAL

Ashtrays are located on passenger’s door SPECIFICATIONS armrests; to use the ashtray raise the corresponding lid, to empty them remove the inner box B-fig. 86. INDEX

77 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 78

SUNROOF (where provided) DASHBOARD

AND CONTROLS The sunroof consists of two wide panes (a fixed one and a moving one), fitted with a front powered sun curtain and a rear manual sun curtain. Sunroof only works SAFETY DEVICES with ignition key at ON. Controls A, B and C on the central ceiling light shall be fig. 89 F0L0312m used to open/close the sunroof and the fig. 90 F0L0174m powered sun curtain.

OF THE CAR REAR ROLLER SUNBLINDS To close CORRECT USE To open (where provided) fig. 89 Turn knob A-fig. 90 counter-clockwise Certain versions can be fitted on rear With fully closed sunroof (knob at 0), turn and select one of the possible five closing doors with roller sunblinds, with reels and knob A-fig. 90 clockwise and select one positions. of the five possible opening positions. WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND return springs. Every position corresponds to a type of Unwind the sunblind using tab A and se- Every position corresponds to a type of sunroof closing. For closing the sunroof cure it to the upper catches B. sunroof opening, e.g.: position 1 corre- fully with just one operation, set the knob sponds to the narrowest opening (sunroof A-fig. 90 to 0. IN AN almost closed) whereas position 5 corre- EMERGENCY sponds to the widest one (sunroof fully open). For wide opening with just one knob op- CAR eration, set it right to the last position. Do not open the sunroof if MAINTENANCE there is snow or ice on it: it could be damaged. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

78 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 79

Front sun curtain opening/closing ANTI-CRUSHING SAFETY Sunroof initialisation Press button B-fig. 90 to open the sun SYSTEM Proceed as follows: curtain fully. Press the button again to stop Sunroof is fitted with anti-crushing safety ❒

turn the ignition key to ON; DASHBOARD

it. system that detects the presence of an ob- AND CONTROLS ❒ To close the sun curtain press button C- stacle during sunroof closing stroke and turn knob A-fig. 90 fully counter- fig. 90. Press the button again to stop it. that cuts in by stopping and reversing the clockwise; sunroof stroke.

❒ SAFETY Caution: opening the sunroof with the sun press and keep knob A-fig. 90 DEVICES curtain closed will make the sun curtain The anti-crushing safety system fitted on pressed until the sunroof locks, then open automatically. the front curtain outline is active along the release it; whole closing range of the curtain and cuts ❒ into operation when an obstacle is met. within 5 seconds, press and keep knob Rear sun curtain opening/closing A pressed; the sunroof will move au-

This safety device guarantees the rever- OF THE CAR sal for a short section. tomatically, during this stage keep on CORRECT USE Rear sun curtain opening/closing is man- pressing the knob; ual. INITIALISATION PROCEDURE ❒ initialisation will end when the sunroof stops. WARNING MESSAGES

Sunroof and powered sun curtain shall be LIGHTS AND re-initialised after disconnecting the battery or if the relevant protection fuse is blown. IN AN

WARNING EMERGENCY When leaving the car, the ignition key should be removed

to prevent the sunroof from being op- CAR

erated inadvertently and harming any- MAINTENANCE one remaining in the car. Improper use of the sunroof can be dangerous. Be- fore and during its operation ensure that any passengers are not at risk TECHNICAL

from the moving roof either by per- SPECIFICATIONS sonal objects getting caught in the mechanism or by being injured by it directly. INDEX

79 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 80

Sun curtain initialisation Proceed as follows: ❒

DASHBOARD Close the sunroof completely; AND CONTROLS ❒ turn the ignition key to OFF for 10 seconds;

SAFETY ❒ DEVICES turn the ignition key to ON; ❒ turn the knob to closing position and keep it pressed until hearing the me- fig. 91 F0L0215m fig. 92 F0L0216m chanical lock; ❒ OF THE CAR initialisation ended. ANTI-CRUSHING SYSTEM EMERGENCY OPERATION CORRECT USE INHIBITION fig. 91-92 Ice or other foreign matters in the sun- If the electrical control device does not roof rails could cause anti-crushing re- work, the sunroof can be operated man- WARNING MESSAGES

LIGHTS AND peated operation. Therefore make sure ually as follows: there is no obstacle. ❒ remove the rear ceiling light and take In this case it is possible to inhibit the an- out the emergency operation wrench, ti-crushing system by closing the roof provided as standard, from the rele- IN AN (within 5 seconds from system activation), vant seat; EMERGENCY turning knob A-fig. 90 to 0 and keeping ❒ it pressed upwards until closing. fit the wrench into slot A-fig. 92 and turn it clockwise to open the sunroof

CAR and counter-clockwise to close it. MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

80 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 81

DOORS

CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING DASHBOARD SYSTEM AND CONTROLS

From the outside fig. 93 SAFETY With the doors closed, press remote con- DEVICES trol button Á or, if the remote control is malfunctioning, fit and turn the emer- fig. 93 F0L0100m fig. 95 F0L0112m gency metal insert into the lock of one of the front doors.

CHILD LOCK fig. 95 OF THE CAR CORRECT USE From the inside fig. 94 To prevent opening the rear doors from the inside. With the doors closed, press buttons A This device can be engaged only with

or , set on the central panel to lock or WARNING

B MESSAGES unlock the doors. doors open: LIGHTS AND IMPORTANT If one door is not perfect- ❒ position 1 - engaged (door locked); ly closed or there is a system failure, cen- ❒ position 2 - disengaged (door open- tral door locking will not work and after IN AN

able from inside). EMERGENCY a few seconds the device will be exclud- fig. 94 F0L0529m ed for about 2 minutes. During this time The device stays on even if the doors are unlocked by the centralised system. it is however possible to lock/unlock the When the doors are locked, the led C doors manually. The device will be reac- IMPORTANT Always use this device CAR tivated after 2 minutes. on button is turned on. when transporting children. MAINTENANCE If the cause of malfunctioning has been removed the device will operate regularly IMPORTANT After engaging the lock, again. check by trying to open a rear door with the internal handle. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

81 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 82

POWER WINDOWS WINDOW SAFETY SYSTEM INITIALISATION All versions are fitted with power win- Safety system shall be re-initialised after

DASHBOARD dows with anti-crushing safety device to

AND CONTROLS disconnecting the battery or if the rele- detect the presence of an obstacle in the vant protection fuse is blown. window closing stroke. If an obstacle is detected, the safety system will stop window Initialisation procedure: SAFETY DEVICES closing and, according to window position, ❒ will also reverse window stroke. open completely manually or automatically the window to initialise ; IMPORTANT In the event that the anti- fig. 96 F0L0043m ❒ crushing function is activated 5 times in fully close the window manually (with- only 1 minute, the system will automati- out stops);

OF THE CAR IMPORTANT With the ignition key to CORRECT USE ❒ cally enter the “recovery” mode (self-pro- OFF or removed, the power windows re- after window stopping, keep on press- tection). This conditions is pointed out by main activated for about 2 minutes and are ing the closing control for at least 1 the fact that, in the closing phase, the win- deactivated immediately the moment a second. dow goes up in jerks. door is opened. WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND So, it is necessary to carry out the system restore procedure, acting as follows: ❒ open the windows;

IN AN WARNING

EMERGENCY or ❒ The system conforms to the turn the ignition key to OFF and then forthcoming standard to ON. 2000/4/EC concerning the safety of CAR The logic is restored if no malfunction is passengers leaning out of the pas-

MAINTENANCE present, the window returns to its normal senger compartment. operation automatically; otherwise contact a Fiat Dealership. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

82 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 83

D rear right window opening/closing; “automatic continuous” mode operation just during window opening; DASHBOARD

E rear power window enabling/disabling AND CONTROLS controls. SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 97 F0L0388m WARNING fig. 98 F0L0045m Improper use of the power windows can be dangerous.

CONTROLS Front passenger door and rear OF THE CAR Before and during its operation en- CORRECT USE sure that any passengers are not at doors fig. 98 Driver side fig. 97 risk from the moving glass either by Front passenger door armrest and rear On the driver’s door panel are set the but- personal objects getting caught in the door armrests feature the switches to be WARNING mechanism or by being injured by it MESSAGES tons for controlling, with ignition key at used for controlling the corresponding LIGHTS AND ON: directly. Always remove the ignition window. key when getting out of the car to A front left window opening/closing; prevent the power windows being op-

window opening or closing in “auto- erated accidentally and constituting IN AN

matic continuous” mode; a danger to the passengers in the car. EMERGENCY B front right window opening/closing; window opening or closing in “auto-

matic continuous” mode; CAR

C rear left window opening/closing; “au- MAINTENANCE tomatic continuous” mode operation just during window opening; Pressing briefly one of the buttons the window “jerks” whereas a prolonged pressing makes the window opening or TECHNICAL

closing in “automatic continuous” mode. SPECIFICATIONS Pressing the button again will stop the window in the required position. INDEX

83 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 84

BOOT

The boot tailgate (when unlocked) can be

DASHBOARD opened only from the outside through the AND CONTROLS electric opening handle set above the number plate holder fig. 99. If doors are unlocked the boot can be SAFETY DEVICES opened at any time.

Using the instrument panel display (see F0L0046m F0L0100m paragraph “Multifunction display” in this fig. 99 fig. 100 section) it is possible to activate the op-

OF THE CAR tion for independent boot unlocking: in In the event of battery failure, after using OPENING THE TAILGATE BY CORRECT USE this way the boot is not unlocked when the emergency metal insert of the key to REMOTE CONTROL fig. 100 unlocking the doors. get into the car, it will be possible to open R the boot from the inside by operating Press button , even when the alarm IMPORTANT With running car, never op- manually the lever set at the bottom on (where provided) is activated. WARNING MESSAGES

LIGHTS AND erate the tailgate shackle. the right side of the lock, set at the bot- The tailgate opening is indicated by dou- tom in the middle of the tailgate. ble flashing of direction indicators; closing is indicated by one flashing (only if alarm is on). IN AN EMERGENCY TAILGATE CLOSING Lower the tailgate until hearing the lock-

CAR ing click.

MAINTENANCE IMPORTANT If the option for independent boot unlocking is on, before closing the boot, check whether you have with you the ignition key since the boot will

TECHNICAL be locked automatically. SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

84 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 85

The addition of objects EXTENDING THE BOOT (speakers, spoilers, etc.) on the rear shelf or boot lid, except Partial extension (1/3 or 2/3)

those envisaged by the man- DASHBOARD The boot can be partially (1/3 or 2/3) or AND CONTROLS ufacturer, may prevent the gas filled totally extended splitting the rear seat. struts at the sides of the boot from working properly. To make use of the maximum loading vol- SAFETY ume, remove the luggage compartment DEVICES cover following the instructions given in

F0L0047m paragraph “Luggage compartment cover” fig. 101 and lower the loading surface as described WARNING previously.

When using the boot, make TAILGATE EMERGENCY OF THE CAR sure the loads do not exceed OPENING fig. 101 Proceed as follows: CORRECT USE the permitted weight (see section ❒ To open the tailgate from the inside if the lower completely the rear seat head “Technical specifications”). Also restraints; make sure the items in the boot are battery is flat or the electric tailgate lock WARNING ❒ MESSAGES arranged properly to prevent them is failing, proceed as follows (see “Ex- check that the seat belt is not twisted; LIGHTS AND being thrown forwards and injuring tending the boot” in tis section): passengers should you brake sharply. ❒ lower completely the rear head restraints; IN AN

❒ tilt rear seat cushions; EMERGENCY ❒ tilt backrests; ❒ WARNING operate lever A inside the boot to CAR open the tailgate.

Never travel with objects on MAINTENANCE the rear shelf to prevent them being thrown forwards and injuring passengers in case of accident

or sharp braking. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

85 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 86 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 102 F0L0009m fig. 103 F0L0113m fig. 105 F0L0115m

❒

OF THE CAR lift handle A or B-fig. 102 to unlock Total extension fig. 105 CORRECT USE respectively the left or right section of the backrest and then guide the back- Tilt the rear seat completely to obtain rest onto the cushion. maximum boot extension. To make use of the maximum loading vol- WARNING MESSAGES The boot extension to the right fig. 103 LIGHTS AND makes it possible to carry two passengers ume, remove the luggage compartment on the rear seat left-hand side. cover following the instructions given in paragraph “Luggage compartment cover” and lower the loading surface as described IN AN previously. EMERGENCY fig. 104 F0L0114m Proceed as follows: The boot extension to the left fig. 104 ❒ lower completely the rear seat head CAR makes it possible to carry one passenger restraints;

MAINTENANCE on the rear seat right-hand side. ❒ check that the seat belt is not twisted; ❒ lift handles A and B-fig. 102 to release the backrests and guide them onto the

TECHNICAL cushion. SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

86 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 87

IMPORTANT Do not put heavy objects on the cover which may seriously damage it. DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS WARNING The objects put on the cov- SAFETY er may be thrown forwards DEVICES and injure passengers should you fig. 106 F0L0117m fig. 107 F0L0118m brake sharply or in the event of an accident.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT Removing the luggage OF THE CAR COVER fig. 106 compartment cover fig. 107 CORRECT USE The luggage compartment cover A can be Proceed as follows: rolled up and removed. ❒ roll it as described previously; WARNING MESSAGES To roll it up remove the two rear pins B ❒ LIGHTS AND from their housings and then guide it dur- remove the reel unit C by pressing its ing rolling up. sides (direction 1) and raising it (direction 2). IN AN

To refit the cover, insert the reel ends in EMERGENCY their housings and make sure the fastening hooks are well fastened. Now extend the cover by pulling its handles, as previously described, and hook the two rear CAR

pins. MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

87 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 88

IMPORTANT After putting the seats back to their travelling position, restore the seat belt position to make them ready for use. DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS SAFETY DEVICES WARNING fig. 108 F0L0233m Make sure the backrest is fig. 109 F0L0142m properly secured at both

OF THE CAR TO RETURN THE REAR SEAT sides (red bands B not visible) to pre- CORRECT USE BACK TO ITS ORIGINAL vent it moves forward in the event of POSITION fig. 108 sharp braking causing injuries to passengers. Raise the seat backrests and push them WARNING MESSAGES

LIGHTS AND back until hearing the locking click of both retainers. IMPORTANT Correct backrest fastening is guaranteed when the “red band” B aside IN AN DOUBLE LOADING

EMERGENCY levers A is no longer visible. The “red F0L0241m band” actually indicates that the backrest COMPARTMENT fig. 110 is not properly secured. When setting the (where provided) backrest to travelling position, always In addition to fully or partially folding seats, To access the compartment set under- CAR make sure it is properly secured by hear- the car can also be fitted with a loading neath the loading surface, proceed as fol-

MAINTENANCE ing the locking click. surface to be adjusted at two different lows: heights in order to make the loading sur- ❒ raise handle A-fig. 109 pressing in the face flat and to increase or decrease the point shown by the arrow at “PUSH”, boot volume as required. lift the loading surface and secure it by TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS Keeping the loading surface up it will be the proper wire to the upper hook on possible to make use of the space obtained the roof as shown in the figure below as additional compartment for frag- fig. 110. ile or small objects. INDEX

88 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 89 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 111 F0L0177m fig. 112 F0L0141m fig. 113 F0L0138m

Setting the loading surface at To reposition the loading surface to the ANCHORING THE LOAD OF THE CAR upper level proceed as follows: CORRECT USE lower level (where provided) The boot contains the proper hook for To improve the loading space, lower the ❒ raise handle A-fig. 109 pressing in the anchoring the required load fig. 113. luggage compartment surface fig. 111, as point shown by the arrow at “PUSH”, WARNING use the handle to raise the loading sur- MESSAGES follows: LIGHTS AND ❒ face from the boot mat and pull it out- raise handle A-fig. 109 pressing in the wards; the knuckle on the seat side point shown by the arrow at “PUSH”, will facilitate this manoeuvre. use the handle to remove the loading surface from the seat on the suitcase IN AN board by raising it slightly and pulling EMERGENCY it outwards; the knuckle on the seat side will facilitate this manoeuvre.

Boot loading surface set at CAR

top position can withstand 70 MAINTENANCE kg max. and 200 kg at bottom position as shown on the proper label set under the loading surface (see fig. 112). TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

89 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 90

BONNET

TO OPEN THE BONNET DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS Proceed as follows: ❒ pull the lever A-fig. 116 in the direc- SAFETY

DEVICES tion indicated by the arrow in order to release the lock of the engine bonnet; fig. 114 F0L0237m fig. 115 F0L0238m ❒ insert your hand between bonnet and bumper and push the lever B-fig. 117

OF THE CAR Certain versions (where provided) are fit- CORRECT USE WARNING to the left as shown; ted with a luggage retainer net that can be secured to the fastening rings fig. 114. If you want to carry reserve ❒ lift the bonnet and at the same time fuel in a can, follow law reg- release the rod C fig. 118 from the IMPORTANT Never anchor to single ulations, only using a certified can, catch D, then fit the rod end into the WARNING MESSAGES hook a load exceeding 100 kg. LIGHTS AND suitably fastened to the load securing bonnet recess E. Certain versions (where provided) are fit- eyelets. Even in this way the risk of fire is increased in the case of an ac- IMPORTANT Before opening the bonnet, ted with a luggage anti-throw out safety check that windscreen wiper arms are not net secured to the roof at two side seats cident.

IN AN lifted from the windscreen. fig. 115, and at the bottom to the load re- EMERGENCY taining rings set on the wheelhouses.

CAR WARNING

MAINTENANCE A heavy load that has not been secured may cause serious harm. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

90 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 91

WARNING For safety reasons the bonnet must be closed properly DASHBOARD

to avoid its opening while the car is AND CONTROLS travelling. Therefore, always check it is properly closed and the catch engaged. Should you notice that the SAFETY catch is not perfectly engaged when DEVICES travelling, stop the car immediately fig. 116 F0L0048m fig. 118 F0L0116m and close the bonnet.

TO CLOSE THE BONNET fig. 118 OF THE CAR CORRECT USE Proceed as follows: ❒ hold the bonnet up with one hand and WARNING with the other remove rod C from re- WARNING MESSAGES cess E and fit it back into its catch D; If the supporting rod is not LIGHTS AND positioned correctly the bon- ❒ lower the bonnet at approx. 20 cen- net may fall violently. timetres from the engine compart-

ment and then let it drop, ensuring IN AN fig. 117 F0L0524m that it is fully closed and not just held EMERGENCY in position by the safety catch. If the bonnet does not close properly, do not push it down but open it again and WARNING CAR repeat the above procedure. Carry out operations only MAINTENANCE IMPORTANT Always check that the bon- when the car is stationary. net is closed properly to avoid its opening while the car is travelling. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

91 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 92

ROOF RACK/ SKI RACK DASHBOARD

AND CONTROLS The roof rack/ski rack shall be secured to the roof at points A-fig. 119. To mount it, lift the tabs and proceed as SAFETY DEVICES follows: ❒ for versions with sunroof: extract the tabs using the screwdriver provided fig. 119 F0L0222m fig. 120 F0L0231m in the kit to reach the fastening seats fig. 120;

OF THE CAR After few kilometres, check that the fas- CORRECT USE ❒ for versions without sunroof: lift the tening screws are firmly tightened. tabs using the screwdriver provided IMPORTANT Never exceed the max. in the kit to reach the fastening seats permissible loads (see section “Technical fig. 121; WARNING MESSAGES specifications”). LIGHTS AND A roof rack/ski rack specially designed for The car can be fitted with two longitudi- the car is available at Lineaccessori Fiat. nal bars that can be used, by adding special accessories to carry various objects IN AN (e.g.: skis, windsurf, etc..). EMERGENCY fig. 121 F0L0232m

CAR WARNING Open the tailgate with care MAINTENANCE when carrying objects on the roof rack bars to prevent impacts. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

92 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 93

HEADLIGHTS

ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT DASHBOARD BEAM AND CONTROLS Proper adjustment of the headlight beams is of vital importance for your safety and SAFETY comfort and also for the other road users. DEVICES To ensure you and other drivers have the best visibility conditions when travelling fig. 122 F0L0050m fig. 123 F0L0051m with the headlights on, the headlights must be set properly. Contact Fiat Dealership

To adjust the headlight slant OF THE CAR to have the headlights properly adjusted. CORRECT USE fig. 122 IMPORTANT When turning on (Xenon) gas discharge headlight lamps (where pro- Press button A set on the control panel; vided), it is normal that there should be a if the car is fitted with (Xenon) gas dis- WARNING MESSAGES vertical movement of reflectors, and con- charge headlights, slant adjustment is elec- LIGHTS AND sequently the same will also happen to the tronic and therefore button A is not pre- light beam, for the time required to sent. achieve the correct headlight trim stabili- The display located on the instrument pan- sation, equal to approx. 2 seconds. el, provides the visual indication of the po- IN AN sitions during the adjustment operation fig. 124 F0L0519m EMERGENCY Headlight aiming device (fig. 123: multifunctional display - fig. 124: It works with ignition key at and reconfigurable multifunctional display). IMPORTANT Check beam aiming every

ON CAR time the load carried changes. dipped beams on. When the car is loaded, Position 0 - one or two people occupy- it slopes backwards. This means that the ing the front seats. MAINTENANCE headlight beam rises. In this case, it is necessary to return it to the correct position. Position 1 - five people. Position 2 - five people + load in the boot. TECHNICAL

Position 3 - driver + maximum permissi- SPECIFICATIONS ble load stowed in the boot. INDEX

93 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 94

FRONT FOG LIGHT HEADLIGHT BEAM ABS SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENT ABROAD Contact Fiat Dealership to have the head- The dipped beam headlights are adjusted The car is fitted with an ABS braking sys-

DASHBOARD tem, which prevents the wheels from lock-

AND CONTROLS lights properly adjusted. for circulation in the country in which the car is marketed. In countries with oppo- ing when braking, makes the most of road site circulation, to avoid glaring oncom- grip and gives the best control when emer- ing vehicles, it is necessary to cover the gency braking under difficulty road condi- SAFETY DEVICES areas of the headlight using a special stick- tions. er tape provided for the purpose and avail- System is completed by EBD (Electronic able at Lineaccessori Fiat. Contact Fiat Braking Force Distribution), which dis- Dealership. tributes the braking action between front and rear wheels. OF THE CAR CORRECT USE IMPORTANT To have the maximum efficiency of the braking system, it is necessary a setting period of about 500 km (with new car after replacing brake WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND pads/discs): during this period it is better to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged brakes. IN AN

EMERGENCY ESP SYSTEM INTERVENTION When the ABS cuts in, you will feel the brake pedal pulsating slightly and the sys-

CAR tem get noisier: it means that the speed should be altered to fit the type of road sur- MAINTENANCE face. If the ABS system cuts in, it is a sign that the grip between tyre and the road sur-

TECHNICAL face has reached the limit: you must slow SPECIFICATIONS down to match the speed to the road grip available. INDEX

94 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 95

FAILURE WARNINGS EBD failure WARNING EBD failure is indicated by the turning on When the ABS cuts in, and ABS failure of warning lights > and x on the in- you feel the brake pedal pul- DASHBOARD

ABS failure is indicated by the turning on strument panel together with the dedi- sating, do not remove your foot, but AND CONTROLS of warning light > on the instrument pan- cated message on the display (see section keep it pressed; in doing so you will el together with the dedicated message on “Warning lights and messages”). stop in the shortest amount of space the display (see section “Warning lights possible under the current road con- SAFETY

In this case with sharp braking the rear DEVICES and messages”). wheels might lock too early, with the pos- ditions. In this case the braking system is still effi- sibility of skidding. Drive extremely care- cient, though without the aid of the ABS fully to the nearest Fiat Dealership to have system. Drive carefully to the closest Fiat the system checked.

Dealership to have the system checked. OF THE CAR BRAKE ASSIST CORRECT USE (emergency braking assistance) (where provided) WARNING If the brake fluid low warn- WARNING MESSAGES The system, which cannot be cut out, rec- ing light x comes on (to- LIGHTS AND WARNING ognizes emergency braking (on the ground gether with the message on the dis- of the brake pedal operation speed) and If the ABS system cuts in, it play), stop the car immediately and considerably increases the pressure in the contact the nearest Fiat Dealership. is a sign that the grip be- brake circuit. IN AN

tween tyre and the road surface has Fluid leaks from the hydraulic system, EMERGENCY reached the limit: you must slow During emergency braking, the emergency in fact, can compromise the braking down to match the speed to the road lights turn on automatically; when accel- system, both traditional systems and grip available. erating the lights turn off automatically. systems with ABS. CAR Brake Assist is deactivated on the versions equipped with ESP, in the event of ESP sys- MAINTENANCE tem failure (indicated by warning light á WARNING switching on together with the message The ABS exploits the tyre- on the display). road grip at the best, but it TECHNICAL cannot improve it; you should there- SPECIFICATIONS fore take every care when driving on slippery surfaces without taking unnecessary risks. INDEX

95 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 96

ESP SYSTEM WARNING At pickup the ESP system control unit will keep brake force on wheels until reaching (Electronic Stability Performance of the ESP sys- the torque suitable for starting, or in any tem, in terms of active safe- case for max. 1.5 seconds in order to pass DASHBOARD Program) AND CONTROLS ty should not induce the driver to take easily from the brake pedal to the accel- (where provided) pointless and unnecessary risks. The erator pedal. style of driving must in any case al- The ESP system is an electronic system ways be adapted to the conditions of After 1,5 seconds without starting, the SAFETY DEVICES controlling the car stability in the event of the road surface, visibility an traffic. system will deactivate automatically by re- tyre grip loss. Road safety is always the driver’s releasing gradually the brake force. sponsibility. The ESP system is therefore particularly At releasing, the typical brake disengage- useful when grip conditions of the road sur- ment noise indicating that the car is going to move will be heard. OF THE CAR faces changes. CORRECT USE HILL HOLDER SYSTEM ESP SYSTEM INTERVENTION (where provided) Failure indications It is signalled by the blinking of the warn- This system is an integral part of the ESP System failure is indicated by the turning WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND ing light á on the instrument panel, to in- system and it is provided to facilitate start- á form the driver that the car is in critical ing on slopes. on of warning light on the instrument stability and grip conditions. panel (together with the message on the It will activate automatically with the fol- multifunction display) (see section “Warn-

IN AN lowing conditions: ESP SYSTEM OPERATION ing lights and messages”). EMERGENCY Uphill: car at a standstill on a road with a The ESP system is automatically activat- IMPORTANT The Hill Holder system is gradient higher than 5%, engine running, not a parking brake. Never get out of the ed when the car is started and cannot be clutch and brake pedal pressed, gearbox de-activated. car without engaging the handbrake, CAR to neutral or engaged gear other than re- switching the engine off and engaging the verse. MAINTENANCE first gear (position P con with automatic FAILURE WARNINGS Downhill: car at a standstill on a road with transmission). In the event of failure, the ESP system is a gradient higher than 5%, engine running, automatically disconnected and the warn- clutch and brake pedal pressed and re-

TECHNICAL ing light á, comes on with fixed light on verse gear engaged. SPECIFICATIONS the instrument panel, together with the message on the display (see section “Warning lights and messages”). In this

INDEX case contact a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. 96 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 97

WARNING ASR SYSTEM During the use of the space- (AntiSlip Regulator) saver spare wheel, the ESP

(where provided) DASHBOARD

system carries on working. However, AND CONTROLS you must remind that the space-saver spare wheel has dimensions smaller The ASR function controls car drive and than the standard tyre and therefore cuts in automatically every time one or SAFETY its grip is reduced as to the other car both driving wheels slip. DEVICES tyres. According to slipping conditions, two different control systems are activated: fig. 125 F0L0052m ❒ if slipping involves both driving wheels,

the ASR function intervenes reducing SWITCHING THE ASR SYSTEM OF THE CAR the power transmitted by the engine; ON/OFF fig. 125 CORRECT USE WARNING ❒ if slipping involves only one driving The ASR system switches on For correct operation of the wheel, the TC (Traction Control) WARNING

automatically each time the engine is MESSAGES

function cuts in automatically braking LIGHTS AND ESP system, the tyres must started. absolutely be of the same brand and the wheel that is slipping. type on all wheels, in perfect condi- The action of the ASR is particularly help- When travelling ASR can be switched off tions and, above all, of type, brand ful in the following circumstances: and on again pressing switch A set aside and size specified. the gearshift lever. IN AN ❒ slipping of the inner wheel due to the EMERGENCY effect of dynamic load changes or ex- When the ASR is switched off this is cessive acceleration; shown by the lighting up of the led on the switch and by the relevant message on the ❒ too much power transmitted to the display (see section “Warning lights and CAR wheels also in relation to the condi- messages”). MAINTENANCE tions of the road surface; If the ASR is switched off when travelling, ❒ acceleration on slippery, snowy or it will turn on again automatically the next frozen surfaces; time the engine is started. TECHNICAL

❒ in the case of loss of grip on a wet sur- SPECIFICATIONS face (aquaplaning). INDEX

97 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 98

When travelling on snowy roads with FAILURE INDICATIONS EOBD SYSTEM snow chains, it may be helpful to turn the In the event of malfunctioning, the ASR ASR off: in fact, in these conditions, slip- The European On Board Diagnostic sys- ping of the driving wheels when moving off system is automatically disconnected and DASHBOARD á tem (EOBD), fitted to engine electronic AND CONTROLS makes it possible to obtain better drive. the warning light will come on with fixed light on the instrument together with control units, allows monitoring and warn- the message on the display (see section ing of any malfunction to the electronic “Warning lights and messages”). In this systems that could increase exhaust emis- SAFETY DEVICES case contact Fiat Dealership as soon as sions. possible. The objective is: WARNING ❒ To keep system efficiency under con- The performance of the sys- trol;

OF THE CAR tem, in terms of active safe-

CORRECT USE WARNING ty should not induce the driver to take ❒ Warn when a fault causes emission lev- pointless and unnecessary risks. The For correct operation of the els to increase; style of driving must in any case al- ASR system, the tyres must ❒ absolutely be of the same brand and Warn of the need to replace deterio- ways be adapted to the conditions of rated components. WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND the road surface, visibility an traffic. type on all wheels, in perfect condi- Road safety is always the driver’s re- tions and, above all, of type, brand This diagnostic system indicates the pres- sponsibility. and size specified. ence of deteriorated components or system malfunctioning (see section “Warn-

IN AN ing lights and messages”) by the turning on EMERGENCY of the instrument panel warning light U (together with the message on the dis- WARNING play). CAR For correct operation of the

MAINTENANCE ASR system, the tyres must absolutely be of the same brand and type on all wheels, in perfect conditions and, above all, of type, brand

TECHNICAL and size specified. SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

98 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 99

NOTE The car is provided with a diag- TYRE PRESSURE IMPORTANT Tyre pressure should be nostic connector that can be interfaced checked with tyres rested and cold. with appropriate tools, which makes it MONITORING SYSTEM Should it become necessary for whatev- possible to read the error codes stored in er reason to check pressure with hot - T.P.M.S. (where DASHBOARD the control units, together with a series of tyres, do not reduce pressure although it AND CONTROLS specific parameters for engine operation provided) is higher than the prescribed value but re- and diagnosis. This test can also be per- peat the check when tyres are cold. The car can be equipped with the T.P.M.S.

formed by traffic controller agents. SAFETY (Tyre Pressure Monitoring System). This DEVICES IMPORTANT: After a servicing operation system consists of a radio-frequency sen- at Fiat Dealership aimed to eliminate mal- sor, installed on each wheel (on the rim functioning connected to the EOBD sys- inside the tyre) that sends pressure infor- tem, in order to check the system thor- mation to the control unit. OF THE CAR

oughly it could be required to run a bench WARNING CORRECT USE IMPORTANT System control unit moni- test and, if necessary, road tests which The T.P.M.S. system does not may also call for a long journey. tors the pressure of the four car tyres but not the space-saver spare wheel. It is exempt the driver to check therefore recommended to always check tyre and space-saver spare wheel pres- WARNING MESSAGES also the space-saver spare wheel pressure. sure at regular intervals. LIGHTS AND IMPORTANT Pay the utmost attention when checking or inflating tyres. Excessive

pressure impairs road holding, increases IN AN

suspension and wheel stress and causes EMERGENCY abnormal tyre wear. CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

99 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 100

IMPORTANT NOTES ABOUT IMPORTANT Tyre pressure could change SOUND SYSTEM THE T.P.M.S. SYSTEM according to outside temperature. For this reason the T.P.M.S. system could tem- (where provided) Failure indications will not be stored and porarily indicate low tyre pressure. In this DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS therefore will not be displayed when turn- event check pressure with cold tyres and For the operation of the radio with ing the engine off and on again. If failure restore proper inflation values if required. CD/MP3 CD (where provided), read the persists, the control unit will send warn- instructions for use given in the Supple- ing indications to the instrument panel on- IMPORTANT If the car is fitted with ment attached to the Owner Handbook. SAFETY DEVICES ly after a few seconds when the car is T.P.M.S. system, tyre and/or rim removal moving. and refitting operations involve special SOUND SYSTEM precautions; to prevent damages or wrong IMPORTANT T.P.M.S. system cannot in- sensor refitting, contact Fiat Dealership to (where provided) dicate sudden tyre pressure drops (e.g.: have tyre and/or rim changed. The system includes:

OF THE CAR tyre burst). In this event, brake the car CORRECT USE cautiously and avoid sudden steering. IMPORTANT If the car is fitted with ❒ 2 tweeters (power 40W max. each), T.P.M.S. system, when changing a tyre, located on front doors; IMPORTANT Replacing standard tyres change also the rubber seal of the valve. ❒ with winter tyres and vice versa involves Contact a Fiat Dealership. 2 mid-woofers, (diameter 165 mm, WARNING MESSAGES T.P.M.S. system set-up that shall be per- power 40W max. each), located on LIGHTS AND formed at Fiat Dealerships only. IMPORTANT Strong radiofrequency front doors; noise may inhibit regular TPMS system op- ❒ IMPORTANT The T.P.M.S. system re- eration; in this event, a dedicated message 2 full-range speakers, (diameter 165 quires special equipment. Consult Fiat mm, power 40W max. each), located

IN AN will be displayed to warn the driver. This Dealership to know what type of acces- on rear doors.

EMERGENCY message will disappear automatically as sories are compatible with the system soon as noise disappears. (wheels, wheel caps, etc.). Using other accessories could cause system malfunc-

CAR tioning. MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

100 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 101

HI-FI SYSTEM ACCESSORIES (where provided) PURCHASED BY THE The system includes:

OWNER DASHBOARD ❒ AND CONTROLS 2 tweeters (power 40W max. each), If after buying the vehicle, you decide to located on front doors; install electrical accessories that require a ❒ permanent electric supply (alarm, satellite

2 mid-woofers (diameter 165 mm, SAFETY power 40W max. each), located on antitheft system, etc.) or accessories that DEVICES in any case burden the electric supply, front doors; contact Fiat Dealership, whose qualified fig. 126 F0L0535m ❒ 2 tweeters (power 40W max. each), personnel, besides suggesting the most located on rear doors; suitable devices belonging to Lineaccessori

ANTENNA fig. 126 Fiat, will also evaluate the overall electric OF THE CAR ❒ 2 mid-woofers (diameter 165 mm, absorption, checking whether the vehicle CORRECT USE power 40W max. each), located on To remove the antenna, unscrew the stem electric system is able to withstand the rear doors; A anticlockwise 1 until it is completely load required, or whether it needs to be outside the support. ❒ integrated with a more powerful battery.

n° 1 Box subwoofer bass reflex with WARNING MESSAGES integral multichannel amplifier (4 x To refit the antenna screw the stem A LIGHTS AND clockwise 2 until it is fully closed and INSTALLATION OF 25W RMS channels + 2 x 40W RMS aligned with support. channels to drive the 165 mm woofer) ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC DEVICES

with SRS WOW effect ASP. IN AN Electric/electronic devices installed after buying the vehicle and in after-market shall EMERGENCY bear the following marking: CAR MAINTENANCE

Fiat Auto S.p.A. authorizes the installation of transceivers, provided that installation TECHNICAL

is workmanlike performed in compliance SPECIFICATIONS with Manufacturer’s specifications at a specialised service centre.

IMPORTANT The installation of devices INDEX involving modifications of vehicle characteristics may determine the withdrawal of 101 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 102

the driving licence by the appointed pub- PARKING SENSORS lic authorities and the forfeiture of the warranty as concerns defects/failures due (where provided) to said modification or leading directly or DASHBOARD

AND CONTROLS indirectly to it. Parking sensors are located in the rear bumper fig. 127 and their function is to Fiat Auto S.p.A. declines all responsibility inform the driver, through an intermittent due to damages connected with the in- buzzer, about the presence of obstacles SAFETY DEVICES stallation of accessories/devices not supplied by or recommended by Fiat Auto behind the car. S.p.A. and installed not in compliance with the specified prescriptions. ACTIVATION fig. 127 F0L0391m The sensors are automatically activated ❒ OF THE CAR RADIO TRANSMITTERS is constant if the distance is unvaried. CORRECT USE when the reverse gear is engaged. AND CELLULAR TELEPHONES If this situation takes place for side sen- As the distance from the obstacle behind sors, the signal is stopped after about Radio transceiver equipment (e.g.: mobile the car decreases, the acoustic alarm be- 3 seconds to prevent sound indica- phones, HAM radio systems and the like) comes more frequent. tions when performing manoeuvres WARNING MESSAGES shall not be used inside the vehicle unless LIGHTS AND near walls. a separate aerial is mounted on the roof. BUZZER WARNINGS IMPORTANT The use of similar devices Direction distances inside the passenger compartment (with- When the reverse gear is engaged an in- IN AN out separated aerial) produces radio-fre- termittent acoustic signal is automatically Central action radius 150 cm EMERGENCY activated. quency electromagnetic fields which, am- Side action radius 60 cm plified by the resonance effects inside the The acoustic signal: passenger compartment, may cause elec- If several obstacles are detected, the con- ❒ CAR trical systems equipping the vehicle to mal- becomes louder as the reduction of trol unit indicates the nearest one. function. This could compromise safety in distance between the car and the ob- MAINTENANCE addition to constituting a potential hazard stacle decreases; for the passengers. ❒ becomes continuous when the dis- In addition, transmission and reception of tance between the car and the obsta-

TECHNICAL these devices may be affected by the cle is less that 30 cm and stops imme-

SPECIFICATIONS shielding effect of the vehicle body. diately if the distance raises; As concerns , approved mobile phones (GSM, GPRS, UMTS), strictly comply with INDEX the instructions for use provided by the mobile phone’s manufacturer. 102 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 103

FAILURE INDICATIONS For proper operation, the GENERAL WARNINGS In the event of sensor failures, the driver parking sensors shall always ❒ When parking, take the utmost care is warned by the turning on of warning be clean from mud, dirt, snow to obstacles that may be set above or

è or ice. When cleaning the sen- DASHBOARD

light on the instrument panel and by under the sensors. AND CONTROLS sors, take the utmost care to prevent the relevant message on the display (see ❒ section “Warning lights and messages”). their damaging; do not use therefore Objects set close to the car, under dry or rough clothes. Sensors shall be certain circumstances are not detect- SAFETY

ed and could therefore cause damages DEVICES OPERATION WITH TRAILER washed with clean water and car de- tergent, if required. to the car or be damaged. Parking sensor operation is deactivated ❒ Indications sent by the sensors can be automatically when the trailer electric ca- altered by dirt, snow or ice deposit- ble plug is fitted into the car tow hook ed on the sensors or by ultrasound

socket. OF THE CAR systems (e.g.: truck pneumatic brakes CORRECT USE Sensors are reactivated when removing or pneumatic hammers) set nearby the the trailer cable plug. car. WARNING In washing stations, clean sensors quickly WARNING MESSAGES

Parking manoeuvres howev- LIGHTS AND keeping the vapour jet/high pressure er are always under the dri- washing nozzles at 10 cm at least from the ver’s responsibility that shall always sensors. check the absence of people (spe-

cially children) or animals in the ma- IN AN

noeuvre space. This system is just a EMERGENCY help for the driver but she/he shall never reduce attention during dangerous manoeuvres even if performed at low speed. CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

103 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 104

AT THE FILLING DIESEL ENGINES The car must only be filled STATION If the outside temperature is very low, the with diesel fuel for motor ve- diesel thickens due to the formation of hicles, in compliance with Eu-

DASHBOARD ropean Standard EN590. The AND CONTROLS paraffins and could clog the diesel fuel fil- PETROL ENGINES ter. use of other products or mixtures may irreparably damage the engine with in- Use only unleaded petrol. In order to avoid these problems, differ- validation of the warranty due to the SAFETY DEVICES To prevent errors, the diameter of the fu- ent types of diesel are distributed ac- damage caused. In the event of acci- el tank filler is too small to introduce a lead cording to the season: summer type, win- dentally filling with another type of fu- petrol pump filler. Use petrol with a rat- ter type arctic type (mountains/cold ar- el, do not start the engine and empty ed octane number (R.O.N.) not lower eas). the tank. If the engine has been run than 95. If refuelling with diesel fuel not suitable for even for only a very short time, in ad-

OF THE CAR dition to the tank, it is also necessary CORRECT USE the current temperature, mix diesel fuel IMPORTANT An inefficient catalyst leads to drain out the whole fuel circuit. to harmful exhaust emissions, thus con- with TUTELA DIESEL ART additive in the tributing to air pollution. proportions stated on the can, putting first the antifreeze in the tank and then the WARNING

MESSAGES IMPORTANT Never use leaded petrol, diesel fuel. LIGHTS AND even in small amount or in an emergency, REFUELLING Refuel with local diesel fuel if the car is as this would damage the catalyst beyond To guarantee full tank filling, carry out two repair. used/parked in the mountains or in cold areas for a long period. In this event you refuelling operations after the first click of IN AN are recommended to keep an amount of the fuel delivery gun. Avoid further top- EMERGENCY fuel higher than 50% in the tank. ping up operations that could cause damages to the fuel system. CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

104 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 105

PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT DASHBOARD

The devices for curtailing petrol engine AND CONTROLS emissions are the following: ❒ three-way catalytic converter; SAFETY ❒ Lambda sensor; DEVICES ❒ fig. 128 F0L0137m fig. 129 F0L0526m fuel evaporation system. In addition, do not let the engine run, even for a test, with one or more spark plugs

FUEL FILLER CAP fig. 128 When refuelling, position the cap on the OF THE CAR device inside the flap as shown in the fig- disconnected. CORRECT USE The fuel filler cap lock is automatically con- ure. trolled by the central door lock. The devices for curtailing diesel fuel en- If the doors are locked, press the door un- gine emissions are the following: In an emergency (e.g.: electric system fail- WARNING lock button ´ on central panel to refuel. MESSAGES ure) it is possible to unlock it by pulling ❒ oxidising catalytic converter; LIGHTS AND string B. To find the string, remove the The fuel filler cap is re-locked when the ❒ exhaust gas recirculation system right-hand side cover A. doors are locked. (E.G.R.);

To carry out fuelling, open flap C-fig. 129 ❒ diesel particulate filter (DPF). IN AN and unscrew cap D; the cap is fitted with EMERGENCY an antiloss device E which fastens it to the flap so it cannot be mislaid.

The sealing of the tank may cause light WARNING CAR

pressurising in the tank. A little breathing MAINTENANCE off, while slackening the cap, is absolutely Do not put naked flames or normal. lighted cigarettes near the fuel filler hole as there is a danger of fire. Do not bend too close to the hole TECHNICAL

either so as not to breathe in harmful SPECIFICATIONS vapours. INDEX

105 070-106 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 9:04 Pagina 106

WARNING DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER During reclaiming the following phenom- (DPF) ena could take place: idling slight increase, During normal service the fan activation, slight smoke increase, high diesel particulate filter (DPF) The Diesel Particulate Filter is a mechan- exhaust temperatures. These situations DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS reaches high temperatures. Do not ical filter, integral with the exhaust system, shall not be considered as faults and they therefore park the car over inflam- that physically traps particulates present do not affect car performance and envi- mable materials (grass, dry leaves, in the exhaust gases of Diesel engines. ronment. pine needles, etc.): fire hazard. SAFETY DEVICES The diesel particular filter has been adopt- If the dedicated message is displayed, re- ed to eliminate almost totally particulates fer to section “Warning lights and mes- in compliance with current / future law sages”. regulations. During normal use of the car, the engine OF THE CAR CORRECT USE WARNING control unit records a set of data (e.g.: During normal service the travel time, type of route, temperatures, catalyst reaches high tem- etc.) and it will then calculate how much peratures. Do not therefore park the particulates has been trapped by the filter. WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND car over inflammable materials (grass, Since this filter physically traps particulates, dry leaves, pine needles, etc.): fire it shall be cleaned (reclaimed) at regular hazard. intervals by burning carbon particles.

IN AN Reclaiming procedure is controlled auto-

EMERGENCY matically by the engine control unit according to the filter conditions and the conditions of use of the car. CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

106 107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:20 Pagina 107

SSAAFFEETTYY DDEEVVIICCEESS

SEAT BELTS ...... 108 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS S.B.R. SYSTEM ...... 109 PRETENSIONERS...... 110 SAFETY CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY...... 112 DEVICES PRESETTING FOR MOUNTING THE “UNIVERSAL ISOFIX” CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM . 117 FRONT AND SIDE AIR BAGS ...... 118 OF THE CAR CORRECT USE SIDE AIR BAGS ...... 122 WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS IINDEX

107 107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:20 Pagina 108

SEAT BELTS

DASHBOARD USING THE SEAT BELTS AND CONTROLS The belt should be worn keeping the chest straight and rested against the seat back. SAFETY

DEVICES To fasten the seat belts, take hold the tongue A-fig. 1 and insert it into the buckle B-fig. 1, until hearing the locking click. fig. 1 F0L0119m fig. 2 F0L0120m At removal, if it jams, let it rewind for a short stretch, then pull it out again with-

OF THE CAR When the car is parked on a steep slope Rear seat belts shall be worn as shown in CORRECT USE out jerking. the reel mechanism may block; this is nor- the figure. To unfasten the seat belts, press button mal. The reel mechanism prevents the C-fig. 1. Guide the seat belt with your webbing coming out when it is jerked or IMPORTANT When using side and cen- hand while it is rewinding, to prevent it if the car brakes sharply, in a collision or tral seat belts at the same time, fasten first WARNING MESSAGES the side seat belt and then the central one. LIGHTS AND from twisting. when cornering at high speed. Through the reel, the belt automatically The rear seat is fitted with inertial seat belts adapts to the body of the passenger wear- with three anchor points and reel fig. 2.

IN AN ing it, allowing freedom of movement. EMERGENCY

CAR WARNING

MAINTENANCE Never press button C when travelling. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

108 107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:20 Pagina 109

WARNING S.B.R. SYSTEM Never press button C-fig. 1 when travelling. The car is fitted with the S.B.R. system (Seat Belt Reminder), consisting of a DASHBOARD buzzer which, together with the turning AND CONTROLS on of warning light < on the instrument panel, warns the driver to fasten the seat SAFETY belt. DEVICES WARNING For permanent deactivation, contact Fiat fig. 3 F0L0233m Remember that in the event Dealership.With multifunction display, the of a violent collision, back S.B.R. system can only be reset at Fiat seat passengers not wearing seat belts Dealership.

IMPORTANT Correct backrest fastening OF THE CAR is guaranteed when the “red band” B-fig. also represent a serious danger for With reconfigurable multifunction display, CORRECT USE 3 aside levers A-fig. 3 is no longer visible. the front seat passengers. the S.B.R. system can also be reset through The “red band” actually indicates that the the set-up menu. backrest is not properly secured. When WARNING MESSAGES setting the backrest to travelling position, LIGHTS AND always make sure it is properly secured by hearing the locking click.

IMPORTANT After putting the seats back IN AN

to their travelling position, restore the WARNING EMERGENCY seat belt position to make them ready for Make sure the backrest is use. properly secured at both

sides (red bands B not visible) to pre- CAR vent it moves forward in the event of sharp braking causing injuries to pas- MAINTENANCE sengers. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS IINDEX

109 107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:20 Pagina 110

PRETENSIONERS The pretensioner does not require any WARNING maintenance or greasing. The pretensioner can only To increase the efficiency of the seat belts, Anything that modifies its original condi- be used once. After a colli- DASHBOARD the car is fitted with front and rear pre- AND CONTROLS tions invalidates its efficiency. sion that has triggered it, have it re- tensioners (where provided). These de- placed at a Fiat Dealership. Preten- vices, in the event of a violent crash, If due to unusual natural events (floods, seas storm, etc.) the device has been af- sioner validity is written on the label rewind the seat belts a few centimetres. set on the door contour sheet metal. SAFETY DEVICES In this way they ensure that the seat belt fected by water and mud, it must neces- sarily be replaced. Pretensioners should be replaced at adheres perfectly to the wearer before the Fiat Dealership as this date ap- restraining action begins. proaches. Front pretensioners activation is indicat- LOAD LIMITERS ed by buckle withdrawal downwards. To increase passenger’s safety, the front OF THE CAR CORRECT USE Rear pretensioners (where provided) ac- and rear (where provided) seat belt reels tivation is indicated by seat belt retractor contain a load limiter which allows con- locking; the seat belt cannot be drawn trolled sag in such a way as to dose the back up when guiding it manually. force acting on the chest and shoulders Operations which lead to WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND during the belt restraining action in case knocks, vibrations or localised IMPORTANT To obtain the highest de- of front crash. heating (over 100°C for a gree of protection from the action of the maximum of 6 hours) in the pretensioning device, wear the seat belt area around the pretensioners may IN AN keeping it firmly close to the chest and cause damage or trigger them. These EMERGENCY pelvis. devices are not affected by vibrations Pretensioner activation may produce a caused by irregularities of the road sur- small amount of smoke. This smoke is in face or low obstacles such as kerbs, etc. CAR no way toxic and presents no fire hazard. Contact a Fiat Dealership for any as-

MAINTENANCE sistance. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

110 107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:20 Pagina 111 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 4 F0L0060m fig. 5 F0L0061m fig. 6 F0L0062m

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR OF THE CAR WARNING WARNING CORRECT USE USING THE SEAT BELTS The belt should not be twist- For maximum safety, keep The driver must comply with (and have ed. The upper part should the back of your seat up- the car occupants follow) all the local le- pass over the shoulder and cross the right, lean back into it and make sure WARNING MESSAGES

gal regulations concerning the use of seat chest diagonally. The lower part the seat belt fits closely across your LIGHTS AND belts. Always fasten the seat belts before should adhere to the pelvis and not chest and hips. Make sure that the starting. the abdomen of the passenger. Do seat belts of the front and rear pas- not use any objects (pegs, stoppers, sengers are fastened at all times! You Seat belts are also to be worn by expec- etc.) to keep the belts away from the increase the risk of serious injury or IN AN tant mothers: the risk of injury in the case body. death in a collision if you travel with EMERGENCY of accident is greatly reduced for them and the belts unfastened. the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. CAR Of course they must position the lower part of the belt very low down so that it WARNING MAINTENANCE passes under the abdomen (as illustrated Under no circumstances in fig. 4). should the components of the seat belts and pretensioners be TECHNICAL

tampered with or removed. Any op- SPECIFICATIONS eration should be carried out by qualified and authorised personnel. Al- ways contact a Fiat Dealership. IINDEX

111 107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:20 Pagina 112

WARNING HOW TO KEEP THE SEAT CARRYING CHILDREN BELTS ALWAYS IN EFFICIENT If the belt has been subject- SAFELY ed to heavy stress, for ex- CONDITIONS DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS ample after and accident, it should be ❒ Always use the belt with the tape taut For optimal protection in the event of a changed completely together with and never twisted; make sure that it is crash, all passengers must be seated and the anchors, anchor fastening screws free to run without impediments. wearing adequate restraint systems. and the pretensioners. In fact, even if SAFETY

DEVICES ❒ the belt has no visible defects, it could After a serious accident, replace the This is even more important for children. have lost its resilience. belt being worn at that time, even if it does not appear damaged. Always This prescription is compulsory in all EC replace the seat belts if pretensioners countries according to EC Directive have been activated. 2003/20/EC. OF THE CAR CORRECT USE ❒ To clean the belts, wash by hand with Compared with adults, their head is pro- neutral soap, rinse and leave to dry in portionally larger and heavier than the rest the shade. Never use strong deter- of the body, while the muscles and bone gents, bleach or dyes or other chem- structure are not completely developed. Therefore, correct restraint systems are WARNING MESSAGES WARNING

LIGHTS AND ical substance that might weaken the fibres. necessary, other than adult seat belts. The Never travel with a child sit- results of research on the best child re- ting on the passenger’s lap ❒ Prevent the reels from getting wet: straint systems are contained in the Euro- with a single belt to protect them their correct operation is only guar- pean Standard EEC-R44. This Standard en- IN AN both. Do not fasten other objects to anteed if water does not get inside. forces the use of restraint systems classi- EMERGENCY the body. fied in five groups: ❒ Replace the seat belt when showing significant wear or cut signs. Group 0 - 0-10 kg in weight

CAR Group 0+ - 0-13 kg in weight MAINTENANCE Group 1 9-18 kg in weight Group 2 15-25 kg in weight Group 3 22-36 kg in weight TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

112 107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:20 Pagina 113

As it may be noted, the groups overlap WARNING WARNING partly and in fact, in commerce it is possible to find devices that cover more than Children may be placed on SERIOUS DANGER: Never the front seat of cars fitted place cradle child’s seats

one weight group. DASHBOARD

with passenger’s air bag deactivation. facing backwards on the AND CONTROLS All restraint devices must bear the certi- In this case it is absolutely necessary front passenger seat of cars fication data, together with the control to check the amber warning light on fitted with passenger’s air brand, on a solidly fixed label which must the cluster to make sure that deacti- bag since the air bag activa- SAFETY absolutely never be removed. vation has actually taken place (see tion could cause serious injuries, even DEVICES Over 1.50 m in height, from the point of paragraph front and side air bags at mortal. You are advised to carry chil- view of restraint systems, children are point front passenger’s air bag). The dren always on the rear seat, as this considered as adults and wear the seat front passenger’s seat shall be ad- is the most protected position in the belts normally. justed in the most backward position case of a crash. In any case, children’s OF THE CAR

to prevent any contact between seats must absolutely not be fitted on CORRECT USE Lineaccessori Fiat offers seats for each child’s seat and dashboard. the front seat of cars with passenger’s weight group, which are the recommend- air bag, which during inflation could ed choice, as they have been designed and cause serious injury, even mortal, re-

gardless of the seriousness of the WARNING experimented specifically for Fiat cars. MESSAGES crash that triggered it. LIGHTS AND IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS IINDEX

113 107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:20 Pagina 114 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 7 F0L0063m fig. 8 F0L0064m fig. 9 F0L0065m

OF THE CAR GROUP 0 and 0+ fig. 7 GROUP 1 GROUP 2 CORRECT USE Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facing Starting from 9 kg to 18 kg in weight, chil- Starting from 15 kg to 25 kg in weight, chil- backwards on a cradle seat, which, sup- dren may be carried facing forwards, with dren may be restrained directly by the car porting the head, does not induce stress seat fitted with front cushion, through belts. The only function of the seat is to WARNING MESSAGES on the neck in the event of sharp decel- which the car seat belt restrains both child position the child correctly in relation to LIGHTS AND eration. and seat fig. 8. the belts, so that the diagonal part adheres to the chest and not to the neck and that The cradle is restrained by the car seat the horizontal part clings to the child’s belts and in turn it must restrain the child

IN AN pelvis and not the abdomen fig. 9. with its own belts. EMERGENCY

WARNING WARNING CAR The figure is only an example for mounting. Attain to the instructions The figure is only an exam- MAINTENANCE for fastening which must be enclosed with the specific child restrain- ple for mounting. Attain to ing system you are using. the instructions for fastening which must be enclosed with the specific child restraining system you are using.

TECHNICAL WARNING SPECIFICATIONS Seats exist which are suitable for covering weight groups 0 and 1 with a rear connection to the car belts and their own belts to restrain the child. Due to their size, they can be dangerous if installed incorrectly fastened INDEX to the car belts with a cushion. Carefully follow the instructions for installation provided with the seat. 114 107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:20 Pagina 115

PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON CHILD’S SEAT USE Your car complies with the new European Directive 2000/3/EC regulating child’s seat DASHBOARD

assembling on the different car seats according to the following table: AND CONTROLS SEAT Range of Front Rear Central SAFETY Group weight passenger side passenger DEVICES passenger fig. 10 F0L0066m Group 0, 0+ up to 13 kg U (▼)U *

Group 3 OF THE CAR Group 1 9-18 kg U (▼)U * CORRECT USE For children from 22 kg to 36 kg the size of the child’s chest no longer requires a Group 2 15-25 kg U (▼)U * support to space the child’s back from the WARNING seat back. ▼ MESSAGES Group 3 22-36 kg U ( )U * LIGHTS AND Fig. 10 shows proper child seat positioning on the rear seat. Key:

Children taller than 1.50 m can wear seat IN AN

belts like adults. U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to Eu- EMERGENCY ropean Standard EEC-R44 for the specified “Groups”. (▼) on cars not fitted with passenger’s seat adjustable in height, the seat back shall be

positioned perfectly upright. CAR

WARNING (*) Never mount child restraint systems on the rear central seat. MAINTENANCE The figure is only an example for mounting. Attain to the instructions for fastening which

must be enclosed with the specific TECHNICAL child restraining system you are using. SPECIFICATIONS IINDEX

115 107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:20 Pagina 116

Below is a summary of the rules of 4) Always check the seat belt is well fas- WARNING safety to be followed for carrying tened by pulling the webbing. With passenger’s air bag ac- children: 5) Only one child is to be strapped to tive, never place child’s seats DASHBOARD

AND CONTROLS 1) The recommended position for in- each retaining system. with the cradle facing backwards stalling child’s seat is on the rear seat, as 6) Always check the seat belts do not fit since the air bag activation could it is the most protected in the case of a around the child’s throat. cause to the child serious injuries, crash. even mortal, regardless of the seri- SAFETY DEVICES 7) While travelling, do not let the child ousness of the crash that triggered it. 2) If the passenger airbag is deactivated, sit incorrectly or release the belts. You are advised to carry children al- always check that it is properly deactivat- “ ways with proper restraint systems on ed by ensuring the warning light is on 8) Passengers should never carry children the rear seats, as this is the most pro- with a fixed light on the instrument pan- on their laps. No-one, however strong tected position in the case of a crash.

OF THE CAR el. they are, can hold a child in the event of CORRECT USE a crash. 3) Attain to the instructions for fastening the specific child restraint system which 9) In case of an accident, replace the you are using. These instructions must be child’s seat with a new one. WARNING MESSAGES

LIGHTS AND provided by the manufacturer. Keep the child restraint system installation instructions with the car documents and this Handbook. Never use a child restraint sys-

IN AN tem without installation instructions. EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

116 107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:20 Pagina 117

PRESETTING FOR MOUNTING THE

“UNIVERSAL ISOFIX” DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM SAFETY DEVICES This car is preset for mounting the Uni-

versal Isofix child restraint system, a new F0L0121m European standardised system for carry- fig. 12 ing children safely. OF THE CAR Fig. 11 shows a child restraint system by CORRECT USE way of example. The Universal Isofix child’s seat covers weight group: 1. WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND Due to its different anchoring system, the Universal Isofix child’s seat shall be anchored to the proper lower metal rings F0L0318m A-fig. 12, set between rear seat back and fig. 11 IN AN cushion. The upper belt (provided with fig. 13 F0L0122m EMERGENCY the child’s seat) shall be then secured to For any further installation/use detail, re- ring B-fig. 13 set on rear seat backrest. fer to the “Instructions Manual” that must It is possible to mount at the same time be provided by the child restraint system WARNING CAR

both the traditional restraint system and Manufacturer. Mount the child restraint MAINTENANCE the “Universal Isofix” one. system only with the car stationary. The Isofix child restraint sys- Remember that in case of Universal Isofix tem is properly anchored to the child’s seat, you can only use all those

mounting brackets when clicks are TECHNICAL seats approved with the marking ECE heard. In any case, keep to the in- SPECIFICATIONS R44/03 “Universal Isofix”. stallation instructions that must be At Lineaccessori Fiat is available the “Uni- provided by the child restraint system versal Isofix” “Duo Plus” child’s seat. Manufacturer. IINDEX

117 107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:20 Pagina 118

PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON FRONT AND SIDE AIR UNIVERSAL ISOFIX CHILD’S SEAT USE BAGS The table below, according to ECE 16 European Directive, shows the different instal- DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS lation possibilities of Universal Isofix restraint systems on seats fitted with Isofix fas- The car is fitted with front air bags for the teners. driver, for the passenger and with driver’s Range of weight Child’s seat Isofix Isofix position knees air bag (where provided). SAFETY DEVICES orientation class side rear The front driver / passenger air bags and the driver’s knees air bag (where provid- Group 0 to 10 kg Facing backwards E IL ed) have been designed to protect the occupants in the event of head-on crashes of Facing backwards E IL medium-high severity, by placing the cush-

OF THE CAR ion between the occupant and the steer- CORRECT USE Group 0+ to 13 kg Facing backwards D IL ing wheel or dashboard. Facing backwards C IL Front air bags are designed to protect car’s occupants in front crashes and there- Facing backwards D IL WARNING MESSAGES

LIGHTS AND fore non-activation in other types of col- Facing backwards C IL lisions (side collisions, rear shunts, roll- Group I - 9 overs, etc.) is not a system malfunction. to 18 kg Facing forwards B IUF In case of crash, an electronic control unit, IN AN when required, triggers the inflation of the EMERGENCY Facing forwards B1 IUF cushion. The cushion immediately inflates, Facing forwards A IUF placing itself as a protection between the body of the front occupants and the struc-

CAR ture that could cause injuries. Immediate-

MAINTENANCE ly after, the cushion deflates. IUF: suitable for Isofix child restraint systems to be set facing forwards, universal class (fitted with third upper fastener), approved for the weight group. The front driver / passenger air bags and the driver’s knees air bag (where provid- IL: suitable for Isofix TYPE child restraint systems, specific and approved for this type ed) are not a replacement of but comple- TECHNICAL of car. The child’s seat can be installed by moving forward the front seat. mentary to the use of belts, which should SPECIFICATIONS always be worn, as specified by law in Eu- rope and most non European countries. INDEX

118 107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:20 Pagina 119

At their maximum inflation, their volume ❒ in case of wedging under other vehi- fills most of the space between the dash- cles or protective barriers (for exam- 0 board and the passenger. ple under a truck or guard rail), the air 0

70 10

bag is not triggered as it offers no ad- DASHBOARD In case of crash, a person not wearing the ditional protection compared with the AND CONTROLS seat belt moves forward and may come in- seat belts, consequently it would be to contact with the cushion while it is still pointless. Therefore, failure to come inflating. Under this circumstance the pro-

into action in the above circumstance SAFETY tection offered by the air bag is reduced. does not mean that the system is not DEVICES Front air bag may not be activated in the working properly. fig. 14 F0L0360m following situations: In minor crashes (for which the restrain- ❒ in collisions against highly deformable ing action of the seat belts is sufficient), the

DRIVER’S FRONT AIR BAG fig. 14 OF THE CAR objects not affecting the car front sur- air bags are not deployed. Also in this case CORRECT USE face (e.g. bumper collision against it is of vital importance to wear the seat It consists of an instant-inflating cushion guard rail, etc.); belts since in case of side crash they guar- contained in a special recess in the cen- antee proper positioning of the occupant tre of the steering wheel. and prevent the occupants to be pitched WARNING MESSAGES out of the car in case of violent crashes. LIGHTS AND WARNING Do not apply stickers or oth-

er objects to the steering IN AN

wheel or to the air bag cover on the EMERGENCY passenger’s side or on the side roof lining. Never put objects on the dashboard on passenger side since they could interfere with proper air bag in- CAR

flation . MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS IINDEX

119 107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:20 Pagina 120

WARNING SERIOUS DANGER: With passenger’s air bag active, DASHBOARD

AND CONTROLS never place child’s seats with the cradle facing backwards since the air bag activation could cause to the child serious injuries, even mortal. In the case SAFETY DEVICES of need, always deactivate the passenger’s air bag when a child’s seat fig. 15 F0L0068m is placed on the front seat. fig. 16 F0L0383m The front passenger’s seat shall be adjusted in the most backward position

OF THE CAR PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG DRIVER’S KNEES AIR BAG CORRECT USE to prevent any contact between fig. 15 child’s seat and dashboard. Even if (where provided) fig. 16 It consists of an instant-inflating cushion not compulsory by law, you are rec- Knees air bag consists of an instant-inflat- contained into a special recess in the ommended to reactivate the air bag ing cushion housed into a special com-

WARNING immediately as soon as child trans- MESSAGES

LIGHTS AND dashboard, this cushion has a volume big- partment provided for the purpose under ger than that of the driver. port is no longer necessary. the steering wheel at driver’s knees level, designed to give further protection in the event of frontal crash. IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

120 107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:20 Pagina 121

TURNING OFF THE PASSENGER WARNING Two conditions may occur: SIDE FRONT AND SIDE CHEST To turn off the passenger ❒ passenger side front and side chest PROTECTION AIR BAGS side front and side chest pro- protection air bags (Side Bags) on: (Side bags) (where provided) F DASHBOARD tection air bags (if foreseen), please warning light on the instrument AND CONTROLS If it is absolutely necessary to transport a refer to the paragraphs “Multifunc- panel off; it is absolutely prohibited to child on the front seat, the passenger side tional display” and “Reconfigurable ransport children on the front seat. multifunctional display” in the ”Dash- front and side chest protection air bags ❒ SAFETY board and controls” chapter. passenger side front and side chest DEVICES can be turned off (Side Bag). protection air bags (Side Bags) off: warning light F on the instrument panel on; it is possible to transport children on the front seat using proper restraining systems. OF THE CAR CORRECT USE The warning light F on the instrument panel will remain on with a stationary light until the passenger side front and side WARNING

chest protection air bags are turned on MESSAGES again (Side Bags). LIGHTS AND IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS IINDEX

121 107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:20 Pagina 122

SIDE AIR BAGS

The car is fitted with front side bags for

DASHBOARD driver and passenger (where provided), AND CONTROLS front and rear window bags (where provided) for protecting front and rear occupant’s head, rear side bags for driver and SAFETY DEVICES passenger (where provided). Side bags (where provided) protect car occupants from side crashes of medium- fig. 18 F0L0069m high severity, by placing the cushion between the occupant and the internal parts

OF THE CAR SIDE WINDOW BAGS - HEAD CORRECT USE of the side structure of the car. PROTECTION (where provided) Non-activation of side bags in other types fig. 18 of collisions (front collisions, rear shunts, roll-overs, etc...) is not a system malfunc- They are “curtain” cushions located be- WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND tion. hind the side coverings of the roof and covered by proper finishings, studied for In case of side crash, an electronic control the head protection to offer the best pro- unit, when required triggers the inflation tection to the front and rear occupants F0L0125m IN AN of the cushion. The cushion immediately fig. 17 in the event of side crash, thanks to the EMERGENCY inflates, placing itself as a protection, be- wide cushion inflation surface. tween the occupant’s body and the structure that could cause injuries. Immediate- FRONT AND REAR SIDE BAGS - IMPORTANT In the event of side crash, ly after, the cushion deflates. CHEST PROTECTION you can obtain the best protection by the CAR (where provided) fig. 17 system keeping a correct position on the

MAINTENANCE Side bags (where provided) are not a re- seat, allowing thus correct side bag unfold- placement of but complementary to the These side bags consist of two types of in- ing. belts, which you are recommended to al- stant inflation cushions housed in the seat ways wear, as specified by law in Europe back rests and designed to increase protection of the occupants’ chest in the

TECHNICAL and most non-European countries.

SPECIFICATIONS event of a side crash of medium-high severity. INDEX

122 107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:20 Pagina 123

WARNING TURNING OFF THE REAR SIDE WARNING CHEST PROTECTION AIR BAGS Do not hook rigid objects to To turn off the rear side the coat hooks and to the (Rear Side Bags) (where provided) chest protection air bags DASHBOARD

support handles. If it is absolutely necessary to transport a (Rear Side Bags) (if foreseen), please AND CONTROLS child on the rear seats, the rear side chest refer to the paragraphs “Multifunc- protection air bags can be turned off (Rear tional display” and “Reconfigurable Side Bags) (where provided). multifunctional display” in the “Dash- SAFETY board and controls” chapter. DEVICES WARNING Two conditions may occur: Do not cover the backrest of ❒ rear side chest protection air bags on: front seats with trims or cov- warning light À on the instrument ers that are not suitable to be used panel off; it is absolutely prohibited to OF THE CAR with side bags. transport children on the rear seats. CORRECT USE ❒ rear side chest protection air bags off: warning light À on the instrument panel on; it is possible to transport WARNING MESSAGES WARNING children on the rear seats using prop- LIGHTS AND Never rest head, arms and er restraining systems. elbows on the door, on the The warning light À on the instrument

windows and in the window bag area panel will remain on with a stationary light IN AN

to prevent possible injuries during in- until the rear side air bags are turned on EMERGENCY flation phase. again (Rear Side Bags). CAR MAINTENANCE WARNING Never lean head, arms and elbows out of the window. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS IINDEX

123 107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:20 Pagina 124

GENERAL WARNINGS 3) Should an accident occur in which any 4) The triggering of pretensioners, front of the safety devices is activated, take the air bags and front side bags is decided in 1) The front air bags and/or front and car to a Fiat Dealership to have the de- a differentiated manner, depending on the front side bags (where provided) may be

DASHBOARD vices activated replaced and to have the type of crash. The failure to deploy one or AND CONTROLS deployed if the car is subject to heavy system checked. more of them does not mean that the sys- knocks or accidents involving the under- tem is not working properly. body area, such as for example violent Every control, repair and replacement op- shocks, against steps, kerbs or low obsta- erations concerning the air bags must on- SAFETY DEVICES cles, falling of the car in big holes or sags ly be carried out c/o Fiat Dealership. in the road. If you are having the car scrapped, have 2) When the airbag inflates it emits a small the air bag system deactivated at a Fiat amount of dusts. These dusts are harm- Dealership first. If the car changes own- less and is not the beginning of a fire; then ership, the new owner must be informed OF THE CAR CORRECT USE the unfold cushion surface and the car in- of the method of use of air bags and the teriors can be covered by a dusty remains: above warnings and also be given this this dust can irritate skin and eyes. In case “Owner Handbook”. of contact, wash yourself using neutral WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND soap and water. IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

124 107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:20 Pagina 125

WARNING WARNING WARNING If when turning the ignition Life and validity of pyrotech- If the car has been stolen or key to ON, the warning light nic charge and coil contact an attempt to steal it has DASHBOARD

¬ does not turn on or if it stays on are indicated on the label located in- been made, if it has been subjected to AND CONTROLS when travelling (together with the side the lower oddment compart- vandals or floods, have the air bag message on the display) there could ment. As this date approaches, con- system checked by Fiat Dealership. be a failure in safety systems; in this tact Fiat Dealership to have them re- SAFETY event air bags or pretensioners could placed. DEVICES not trigger in case of impact or, in a minor number of cases, they could trigger accidentally. Contact Fiat Dealership immediately to have the OF THE CAR

system checked. CORRECT USE WARNING Never travel with objects on your lap, in front of your WARNING MESSAGES

chest or with a pipe, pencil, etc. be- LIGHTS AND tween your lips; injury may result in the event of the air bag being triggered. IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS IINDEX

125 107-126 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:20 Pagina 126

WARNING WARNING WARNING Remember that with the key By turning the ignition key to The front air bag is triggered engaged and at ON, even the ON position, warning for shocks greater in magni- DASHBOARD

AND CONTROLS with the engine not running, the air light F (with front and side pas- tude than the pretensioners. For im- bags may be triggered on a stationary senger side air bags on) will turn on pacts between these two thresholds, car if it is bumped by another moving and flash for a few seconds to remind it is therefore normal that only the car. Therefore, never seat children on you that the passenger air bags will pretensioners are triggered. SAFETY DEVICES the front seat even when the car is be activated in the case of a collision, stationary. On the other hand, please afterwards it will turn off. remember that when the key is not inserted in the ignition or is in the OFF position, safety devices (air bag or OF THE CAR

CORRECT USE pretensioner) will not activate as a re- WARNING sult of a collision; the failed activa- The air bag does not substi- tion of these devices in these cases tute the seat belts, but only cannot therefore be considered as an WARNING increases their effectiveness. More-

WARNING index of system malfunctioning. MESSAGES By turning the ignition key

LIGHTS AND over, since the front air bags do not to the ON position, the come into operation in the event of warning light À (with rear side front impact at low speed, side colli- chest protection air bags on) will sions, bumps from behind or over-

IN AN turn on and flash for a few seconds turning, in these circumstances the

EMERGENCY to remind you that the rear air bags occupants would only be protected will be activated in the case of a col- by the seat belts which must therefore lision, afterwards it will turn off. always be fastened. CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

126 127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 127

CCOORRRREECCTT UUSSEE OOFF TTHHEE CCAARR

STARTING THE ENGINE ...... 128 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS PARKING...... 131 MANUAL TRANSMISSION ...... 132 SAFETY ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ...... 133 DEVICES CONTAINING RUNNING COSTS...... 138 TOWING TRAILERS...... 139 OF THE CAR

SNOW TYRES...... 142 CORRECT USE SNOW CHAINS ...... 143 CAR INACTIVITY...... 144 WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

127 127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 128

ENGINE STARTING STARTING PROCEDURE FOR We recommend that during PETROL VERSIONS the initial period you do not The car is fitted with an electronic engine Proceed as follows: drive to full car performance DASHBOARD lock device: if the engine fails to start, see (e.g.: excessive acceleration, AND CONTROLS the paragraph “The Fiat CODE system” in ❒ Ensure that the handbrake is up; long journeys at top speed, sharp brak- section “Dashboard and controls”. ❒ put the gear lever into neutral (posi- ing, etc.). The engine may be noisier than usual dur- tions P or N for automatic transmis- SAFETY DEVICES ing the first seconds of operation, espe- sion); cially after it has not been used for a while. ❒ This characteristic feature of the hydraulic press the clutch pedal (or brake ped- tappet system does not compromise func- al with automatic transmission) down to the floor without pressing the ac- When the engine is switched tionality or reliability. This timing system off never leave the key into OF THE CAR celerator; CORRECT USE for petrol engines was adopted to limit the ignition switch to prevent servicing. ❒ turn the ignition key to START and pointless current absorption let it go the moment the engine starts. from draining the battery. If the engine does not start at the first at- WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND tempt, return the ignition key to OFF before repeating starting. IMPORTANT In the event of fast engine WARNING IN AN start-up (i.e.: fitting the ignition key and Running the engine in con- EMERGENCY turning it to ON), any slight jamming is to fined areas is extremely dan- be attributed to correct recognition of the gerous. The engine consumes oxygen electronic key by the ignition switch. and produces carbon monoxide

CAR which is a highly toxic and lethal gas. MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

128 127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 129

STARTING PROCEDURE FOR If the engine does not start at the first at- MULTIJET VERSIONS tempt, return the ignition key to OFF before repeating starting. Proceed as follows: DASHBOARD ❒ IMPORTANT In the event of fast engine AND CONTROLS Ensure that the handbrake is up; start-up (i.e.: fitting the ignition key and ❒ Put the gear lever into neutral (posi- turning it to ON), any slight jamming is to tions P or N for automatic transmis- be attributed to correct recognition of the SAFETY sion); electronic key by the ignition switch. DEVICES ❒ IMPORTANT If when fitting the key into F0L0206m Turn the ignition key to ON: the fig. 1 warning lights m and Y on the in- the ignition switch, the multifunction dis- strument panel will turn on; play shows the message stating that the electronic key has not been recognised, IMPORTANT If when fitting the key into OF THE CAR ❒ CORRECT USE the ignition switch, the multifunction dis- Wait for the warning lights m and remove and refit the key; if the problem play shows the message stating that the Y to turn off. The hotter the engine persists try with the other keys provided electronic key has not been recognised, is, the quicker this will happen; with the car. If you still cannot start the remove and refit the key; if the problem ❒ Press the clutch pedal (or brake ped- engine, contact Fiat Dealership. WARNING MESSAGES persists try with the other keys provided al with automatic transmission) down IMPORTANT If it is not possible to turn LIGHTS AND with the car. If you still cannot start the to the floor without pressing the ac- the ignition key to ON, remove the emer- engine, contact Fiat Dealership. celerator; gency key, fit it into slot A-fig. 1 to un-

IMPORTANT If it is not possible to turn ❒ Turn the ignition key to START as lock the ignition switch; then, turn the key IN AN the ignition key to ON, remove the emer- soon as warning light m goes out. If to ON and follow the starting procedure. EMERGENCY gency key, fit it into slot A-fig. 1 to un- you wait too long you will lose the Contact Fiat Dealership. lock the ignition switch; then, turn the key benefit of the work done by the glow IMPORTANT Never leave the ignition key to ON and follow the starting procedure. plugs. Release the key as soon as the into the ignition switch when the engine CAR Contact Fiat Dealership. engine starts. is off. In this event, when opening the dri- MAINTENANCE IMPORTANT Never leave the ignition key IMPORTANT With cold engine, the accel- ver’s door, a buzzer will sound for about into the ignition switch when the engine erator pedal shall be completely released 1 second. is off. In this event, when opening the dri- while turning the ignition key to START. ver’s door, a buzzer will sound for about TECHNICAL

1 second. SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

129 127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 130

HOW TO WARM UP THE Never bump start the engine STOPPING THE ENGINE ENGINE AFTER IT HAS JUST by pushing, towing or coasting Turn the ignition key to OFF while the STARTED (petrol and diesel downhill as this could cause engine is idling.

DASHBOARD engines) AND CONTROLS fuel to flow into the catalytic IMPORTANT After a taxing drive, you Proceed as follows: exhaust system and damage it beyond repair. should allow the engine to “catch its ❒ Drive off slowly, letting the engine turn breath” before turning it off by letting it SAFETY DEVICES at medium revs. Do not accelerate idle to allow the temperature in the en- abruptly; gine compartment to fall. ❒ Do not drive at full performance for IMPORTANT If the engine is turned off the initial kilometres. Wait until the while the car is still moving, for safety rea- coolant temperature gauge starts sons it will be impossible to remove the OF THE CAR CORRECT USE moving. A quick burst on the acceler- key from the ignition switch. To remove ator before turning off the en- the key, turn it to ON and then to OFF gine serves absolutely no prac- with the car stopped without forcing at re- tical purpose, it wastes fuel moval. WARNING

MESSAGES and is damaging especially to tur- LIGHTS AND bocharged engines. IN AN EMERGENCY

CAR WARNING

MAINTENANCE Remember that the servo- brake and power steering are not operational until the engine has been started, therefore much ef-

TECHNICAL fort than usual is required on the SPECIFICATIONS brake pedal and steering wheel. INDEX

130 127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 131

PARKING THE CAR

Proceed as follows: DASHBOARD ❒ Stop the engine and engage the hand- AND CONTROLS brake; ❒ Engage a gear (on a slope, engage first SAFETY gear if the car is faced uphill or reverse DEVICES if it is faced downhill; position P with

F0L0207m automatic transmission) and leave the F0L0373m fig. 2 wheels steered. fig. 3 Block the wheels with a wedge or a stone

IMPORTANT If after turning the engine HANDBRAKE fig. 3 OF THE CAR off with the car stopped, it is not possi- if the car is parked on a steep slope. Do CORRECT USE ble to remove the key from the ignition not leave the key in the ignition switch to The handbrake lever is located between switch, try to turn it to ON and then to prevent draining the battery. Always re- the two front seats. OFF. If the problem persists, remove the move the key when you leave the car. Pull the handbrake lever upwards until the WARNING MESSAGES emergency key without forcing and fit it Never leave children unattended in the car cannot be moved. Four or five clicks LIGHTS AND into the proper slot A-fig. 2 in the igni- car. Always remove the ignition key when are generally enough when the car is on tion switch; now it will be possible to turn leaving the car and take it out with you. level ground while nine or ten may be re- the key to OFF and remove it. Contact quired if the car is on a steep slope or Fiat Dealership. laden. IN AN EMERGENCY WARNING If you turn the electronic key IMPORTANT If this is not the case, con- to OFF position, external lights and elec- tact Fiat Dealership to have the handbrake tronic safety systems are turned off. adjusted. CAR

When the handbrake lever is pulled up MAINTENANCE and the ignition key is at ON the instrument panel warning light x will come on. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

131 127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 132

To release the handbrake: MANUAL ❒ slightly lift the handbrake and press re- TRANSMISSION lease button A; DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS ❒ keep button A pressed and lower the To engage the gears, press the clutch ped- lever. Warning light x will turn off. al fully and shift the gear lever into one of the required positions (the diagram is Press the brake pedal when carrying out shown on the knob). SAFETY DEVICES this operation to prevent the car from moving accidentally. IMPORTANT The car can only be put in- to reverse gear when it has stopped mov- F0L0146m ing completely. With the engine running, fig. 4 before engaging the reverse, wait at least

OF THE CAR 2 seconds with the clutch pedal fully down CORRECT USE to prevent damage and grating of the gears. To engage reverse (R) from neutral pro- WARNING MESSAGES

LIGHTS AND ceed as follows: IN AN

EMERGENCY fig. 5 F0L0200m

Petrol versions fig. 4 CAR ❒ shift the lever to the right and then MAINTENANCE back;

Multijet versions fig. 5

TECHNICAL ❒ lift the sliding ring A under the knob SPECIFICATIONS and shift the lever straight to the left and then forward. INDEX

132 127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 133

WARNING ELECTRONIC To change gears properly AUTOMATIC you must push the clutch TRANSMISSION DASHBOARD pedal fully down. It is therefore es- AND CONTROLS sential that there is nothing under the pedals: make sure mats are lying flat The car may be fitted with 5-speed (petrol and do not get in the way of the ped- versions) or 6-speed (Multijet versions) SAFETY als. automatic transmission with electronic DEVICES control. Gears are shifted automatically

according to instant car parameters of use F0L0315m (speed and accelerator pedal position). fig. 6 Gears can however be shifted manually us-

GEAR LEVER fig. 6 OF THE CAR ing transmission in sequential mode. CORRECT USE P Parking IMPORTANT Read carefully the follow- Do not drive with your hand ing points to learn how to use the elec- R Reverse resting on the gear lever as the tronic automatic transmission right from WARNING MESSAGES

N Idle LIGHTS AND force exerted, even if slight, the start. could lead over time to pre- D Drive, automatic forward gear mature wear on the gearbox internal components. + To upshift in sequential mode IN AN

– To downshift in sequential mode EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

133 127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 134

DISPLAY Reverse (R) To shift from N, release the ac- The display shows: With gear lever at R, it is not possible to celerator pedal and make sure the engine is idling. ❒ start the engine. DASHBOARD selected gear (P, R, N, D) and word- AND CONTROLS ing AUTO, in automatic mode; Idle (N) ❒ upshifting or downshifting (through digits) in sequential mode. This position corresponds to the idle po- SAFETY DEVICES sition of a traditional manual gearbox. GEAR LEVER POSITIONS With gear lever at N, it is possible to start Shifting from N → D is free the engine. whereas for shifting from N → Parking (P) Engage idle N in case of long stops. R or P you have to press the

OF THE CAR gear lever button. CORRECT USE Select P to stop mechanically the driving wheels. Drive, automatic forward gear (D) Engage this position only with the car sta- Engage position D for urban and extra-ur- tionary, pull the handbrake if required. ban use of the car. WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND

Shifting the lever from P to D (P → D), from N to D

IN AN (N → D) and from R to D (R EMERGENCY → D) shall be only performed Reverse shall only be engaged with the car stationary and the engine idling. To shift from P to whatever with car stationary, engine CAR position, with ignition key at idling and accelerator fully released. MAINTENANCE ON, press the brake pedal and press the gear lever button. TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS Shifting from R → N or D is free whereas for shifting R → P you have to press the gear lever

INDEX button.

134 127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 135

ENGINE STARTING Proceed as follows: IMPORTANT: Take the utmost care in ❒ ❒ the following conditions: handbrake and Handbrake engaged and gear lever at Set gear lever to N and press the brake pedal released with engine idling and P or N: engine can be only started with brake pedal

gear lever at D, R or sequential since the DASHBOARD the gear lever in one of these posi- ❒ car can move also without pressing the ac- AND CONTROLS tions. Restart the engine by turning the key to START and set the gear lever to celerator pedal. ❒ With lever at P press the brake pedal D. The above condition can be used for park- SAFETY and turn the ignition key to START ing in narrow spaces, taking care to op- DEVICES without pressing the accelerator ped- erate the brake pedal only. al. ❒ With lever at N press the brake ped- WARNING al and turn the ignition key to START

Running the engine in con- OF THE CAR without pressing the accelerator ped- CORRECT USE al. fined areas is extremely dangerous. The engine consumes oxygen If the engine fails to start at first attempt, and produces carbon monoxide WARNING turn the key to OFF before trying to which is a highly toxic and lethal gas. WARNING

Never leave children unat- MESSAGES restart. tended in the car. LIGHTS AND IMPORTANT With engine off, never leave the ignition key at ON to prevent drain-

ing the battery. IN AN

MOVING OFF EMERGENCY IMPORTANT: if when travelling with gear lever at D or in sequential Proceed as follows: mode you turn inadvertently the key ❒ at P position, press the brake pedal; Shifting from P, with ignition to OFF the engine will turn off and key at ON, is only possible CAR ❒ press the gear lever button and move with brake pedal pressed.

transmission will fail. MAINTENANCE the gear lever to the required position (D or R); ❒ accelerate gradually; the car moves off

and gearshifting will be automatic. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

135 127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 136

SEQUENTIAL MODE When stopping the car with a gear high- AUTOMATIC MODE er than 1st gear, transmission will set au- In sequential mode, the electronic auto- tomatically at 1st gear. D can be selected from sequential mode matic transmission works like a fixed gear under whatever driving condition. DASHBOARD

AND CONTROLS sequential gearbox. When stopping the car under poor grip conditions (snow, ice), at next starting the When passing from sequential mode to D, From position D move the gear lever left- transmission control unit could engage a the gear to engage is selected by trans- wards: gear higher than 1st gear to prevent wheel mission control unit according to engine SAFETY

DEVICES rpm and speed (accelerator pedal posi- ❒ move gear lever to +: to upshift; slipping. This shall not be considered as a fault tion). ❒ move gear lever to –: to downshift. IMPORTANT: in the event of excessive Low engine power demand will result in Gears are displayed by digits on the in- oil temperatures (see section “Warning long gears engagement and reduced fuel strument panel. Non-stop monitoring car- lights and messages”), the electronic con- consumption. Increasing speed by press- OF THE CAR CORRECT USE ried out by transmission control unit ex- trol intervenes excluding sequential mode ing the accelerator will automatically en- cludes whatever possibility of error. and activating automatic mode in order to gage short gears that will result in im- safeguard transmission life. Sequential proved performance as to pickup and ac- Downshifting (or upshifting) is only pos- celeration: in this case fuel consumption sible if engine rpm enables it. mode will be resumed as soon as regular WARNING

MESSAGES will increase. LIGHTS AND operating temperatures are restored. In sequential mode, electronic transmis- For speedy pickup: sion control can however intervene in self- adapting mode by shifting gears automat- ❒ press the accelerator pedal flat-out,

IN AN ically when engine rpm exceeds or falls be- the kick-down device will cut in to ob-

EMERGENCY low the admitted rpm limit. tain max. performance in terms of pickup and acceleration. In this case fuel consumption will obviously increase.

CAR IMPORTANT When driving under poor

MAINTENANCE grip conditions (snow, ice, etc.) avoid to engage the kick-down device. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

136 127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 137

FAILURE INDICATIONS PARKING THE CAR TOWING THE CAR Failures to the electronic automatic trans- Engage the handbrake and set gear lever to IMPORTANT Comply with current local mission is indicated by the turning of warn- P. Leave the wheels steered. Block the regulations to tow the car. DASHBOARD

ing light t on the instrument panel to- wheels with a wedge or a stone if the car AND CONTROLS gether with the dedicated message on the is parked on a steep slope. If the car is to be towed, observe the fol- multifunction display (see section “Warn- lowing recommendations: Do not leave the ignition key at ON to ing lights and messages”). ❒ transport the car, if possible, on the SAFETY

prevent draining the battery. Always re- DEVICES Contact Fiat Dealership as soon as possi- move the key when you leave the car. flatbed of a wrecker or maintenance ble to have the fault removed. vehicle; ❒ should this not be possible, tow the STOPPING THE CAR car with the front driving wheels

raised from ground. OF THE CAR To stop the car: CORRECT USE ❒ For towing the car, the gear lever shall be release the accelerator pedal; set to N. ❒ press the brake pedal. WARNING WARNING MESSAGES

Never leave children unat- LIGHTS AND IMPORTANT With the car on a sloping tended in the car. road and engine running, keep the car Do not start the engine when stopped just using the brake pedal, do not towing the car.

press the accelerator pedal. IN AN EMERGENCY With the car parked with engine running BUZZER WARNINGS and gear lever at D, R or in sequential mode, keep the brake pedal pressed to The warning buzzer will sound and P po-

prevent car moving off by engine idling. sition will flash for a few seconds when the Failure to observe the above CAR ignition key is at OFF and the gear lever instructions could seriously For long stops set gear lever to P. MAINTENANCE is not set at P. damage the automatic trans- Ignition key can only be removed with mission. gear lever at P. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS WARNING Never leave children unattended in the car. INDEX

137 127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 138

CONTAINING Roof rack/ski rack DRIVING STYLE RUNNING COSTS Remove the roof rack or the ski rack from the roof as soon as they are no longer Starting DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS Here are some suggestions which may used. These accessories lower air pene- Do not warm the engine with the car at help you to keep the running costs of your tration and adversely affect consumption a standstill or at idle or high speed: under car down and lower the amount of toxic levels. When needing to carry particular- these conditions the engine warms up emissions released into the atmosphere. ly voluminous objects, preferably use a much more slowly, increasing electrical SAFETY DEVICES trailer. consumption and emissions. It is therefore GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS advisable to move off immediately, slow- Electric devices ly, avoiding high speeds. This way the engine will warm faster. Car maintenance Use electric devices only for the amount

OF THE CAR of time needed. Rear heated window, ad- CORRECT USE Have checks and adjustments carried out Unnecessary actions in accordance with the “Service schedule”. ditional headlights, windscreen wipers and heater fan need a considerable amount of Avoid accelerating when waiting at traffic energy, therefore increasing the require- lights or before switching off the engine. Tyres ment of current increases fuel consump- This and also double declutching is ab- WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND Check the pressure of the tyres routine- tion (up to +25% in the urban cycle). solutely pointless on modern cars and al- ly at an interval of no more than 4 weeks: so increase consumption and pollution. if the pressure is too low, consumption Climate control levels increase as resistance to rolling is IN AN The air conditioner is an additional load Gear selection

EMERGENCY higher. which greatly affects the engine leading to As soon as the conditions of the traffic and higher consumption (on average up to road allow, use a higher gear. Using a low Unnecessary loads +20%). When the temperature outside gear to obtain brilliant performance in-

CAR Do not travel with too much luggage the car permits it, use the air vents where creases consumption. possible.

MAINTENANCE stowed in the boot. The weight of the car (especially when driving in town) and its In the same way improper use of a high trim greatly affects consumption and sta- Spoilers gear increases consumption, emissions an bility. engine wear. The use of non-certified aerodynamic

TECHNICAL items may adversely affect air drag and SPECIFICATIONS consumption levels. INDEX

138 127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 139

Top speed Traffic situations and road TOWING TRAILERS Fuel consumption considerably increases conditions with speed. Avoid superfluous braking and Rather high consumption levels are tied to

IMPORTANT NOTES DASHBOARD

accelerating, which cost in terms of both situations with heavy traffic, for example AND CONTROLS fuel and emissions. in queues with frequent use of the lower For towing caravans or trailers the car gears or in cities with many traffic lights. must be fitted with a certified tow hook Acceleration Also winding mountain roads and rough and an adequate electric system. Installa- SAFETY road surfaces adversely affect consumption should be carried out by specialised DEVICES Accelerating violently increasing the revs tion. personnel who release a special document will greatly affect consumption and emis- for circulation on the road. sions: acceleration should be gradual and should not exceed the maximum torque. Traffic hold-ups Install any specific and/or additional rearview mirrors as specified by law. OF THE CAR

During prolonged hold-ups (e.g.: level CORRECT USE CONDITIONS OF USE crossings) the engine should be switched Remember that when towing a trailer, off. steep hills are harder to climb, the brak- Cold starting ing spaces increase and overtaking takes

longer depending on the overall weight. WARNING MESSAGES Short journeys and frequent cold starts do LIGHTS AND not allow the engine to reach optimum Engage a low gear when driving downhill, operating temperature. This results in a rather than constantly using the brake. significant increase in consumption levels

The weight the trailer exerts on the car IN AN (from +15 to +30% on the urban cycle) tow hook reduces by the same amount EMERGENCY and emission of harmful substances. the actual car loading capacity. To make sure the maximum towable weight is not exceeded (given in the log book) account should be taken of the fully laden trailer, CAR

including accessories and personal be- MAINTENANCE longings. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

139 127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 140

Do not exceed the speed limits of the INSTALLING THE TOW HOOK An electric brake should be supplied di- country you are driving in. In any case do rectly by the battery through a cable with not exceed 100 km/h. The towing device should be fastened to a cross section of no less than the body by specialised personnel accord- 2

DASHBOARD 2.5 mm .

AND CONTROLS It is recommended to use a proper towing to any additional and/or integrative in- ing stabiliser on the trailer drawbar. formation supplied by the Manufacturer of IMPORTANT Electric brake or other de- the device. vice shall be used with running engine. SAFETY

DEVICES The towing device must meet current reg- In addition to the electrical branches, the ulations with reference to 94/20/EC Di- car’s electric system can only be con- rective and subsequent amendments. nected to the supply cable for an electric WARNING brake and to the cable for an internal light, For any version the towing device used though not above 15W. The ABS system with which must match the towable weight of the car OF THE CAR CORRECT USE the car may be fitted does on which it is to be installed. For connections use the preset control not control the trailer braking system. unit with battery cable no less than 2.5 Drive with extreme care on slippery For the electric connection a unified con- mm2. roadbeds. nector should be used which is generally placed on a special bracket normally fas- WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND tened to the towing device, and a special ECU for external trailer light control shall be installed on the car. WARNING

IN AN For the electrical connection, 7 or 13 pin

EMERGENCY Under no circumstances 12VDC connection is to be used (CU- should the car brake system NA/UNI and ISO/DIN Standards). Follow be altered to control the trailer brake. the instructions provided by the car man- The trailer braking system must be ufacturer and/or the tow hitch manufac- CAR fully independent of the car hydraulic turer.

MAINTENANCE system. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

140 127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 141

ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM fig. 7 The tow hook structure must be fastened using a total of 4 M10 screws (A). DASHBOARD Thickness of upper plates, left B and right C, shall be 6 mm min. AND CONTROLS Thickness of lower plates, left E and right F, shall be 8 mm min. SAFETY The hook should be fastened to the body avoiding any type of drilling DEVICES and trimming of the rear bumpers that remains visible when the hook is removed. IMPORTANT It is compulsory to fasten a label (plainly visible) of suitable size and material with the following wording: OF THE CAR MAX LOAD ON BALL 70 kg CORRECT USE After fitting, screw holes shall be sealed to prevent exhaust gas inlet. WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE

fig. 7 F0L0236m TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

141 127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 142

SNOW TYRES IMPORTANT When snow tyres are used WARNING with a max speed index below the one that can be reached by the car (increased The max speed for snow Use snow tyres of the same size as the tyres with “Q” marking is DASHBOARD normal tyres provided with the car. by 5%), place a notice in the passenger’s AND CONTROLS compartment, plainly in the driver’s view 160 km/h; 190 km/h for tyres with “T” Fiat Dealership will be happy to provide which states the max permissible speed of marking and 210 km/h for tyres with advice concerning the most suitable type the snow tyres (as per EC Directive). H marking. The Road Traffic Code of tyre for the customer’s requirements. speed limits must however be always SAFETY DEVICES All four tyres should be the same (brand strictly observed. For the type of tyre to be used, inflation and track) to ensure greater safety when pressures and the specifications of snow driving and braking and better driveabili- tyres, follow the instructions given in para- ty. graph “Wheels” in section “Technical Remember that it is inappropriate to OF THE CAR

CORRECT USE specifications”. change the direction of rotation of tyres. The winter features of these tyres are reduced considerably when the tread depth is below 4 mm. In this case, they should WARNING MESSAGES

LIGHTS AND be replaced. Due to the snow tyre features, under normal conditions of use or on long motor- way journeys, the performance of these IN AN

EMERGENCY tyres is lower than that of normal tyres. It is therefore necessary to limit their use to the purposes for which they are certified. CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

142 127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 143

SNOW CHAINS Versions Tyres on which chains Type of snow chains can be fitted to be used Use of snow chains should be in compli-

ance with local regulations. 1.8 - 2.2 205/55 R16 91V DASHBOARD Snow chains with reduced size with AND CONTROLS Snow chains should only be applied to the 1.9 Multijet 215/55 R16 93W max protrusion beyond the tyre driving wheels (front wheels). We rec- 2.4 Multijet profile of 9 mm ommend using Lineaccessori Fiat snow

215/50 R17 91W SAFETY chains. DEVICES Check the tension of the chains after the first few metres have been driven. IMPORTANT Snow chains cannot be fit- OF THE CAR ted to the space-saver spare wheel. So, if Refer to the above mentioned table for information on the wheels where CORRECT USE a front (drive) wheel is punctured and snow chains can be fitted. Follow the prescriptions. chains are needed, a rear wheel should be fitted to the front of the car and the spare WARNING MESSAGES

wheel should be fitted to the rear. This LIGHTS AND way with two normal drive wheels, snow chains can be fitted to them to solve an Keep your speed down when snow chains are fitted. Do not ex- emergency. ceed 40 km/h. Avoid potholes, steps and pavements and avoid also to drive for long distances on roads not covered with snow IN AN

IMPORTANT Snow chains shall only be EMERGENCY a temporary solution. Use snow tyres if to prevent damaging the car and the roadbed. you have to travel for long on roadbeds covered with snow or ice. CAR IMPORTANT With snow chains fitted, use the accelerator with extreme care to MAINTENANCE prevent or to reduce to a minimum driving wheel skidding in order to avoid snow chain breaking that could cause damages to the body or the mechanical parts of the TECHNICAL car. SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

143 127-144 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 144

CAR INACTIVITY ❒ clean and protect the painted parts us- ❒ when the battery is not disconnected ing protective wax; from the electric system, if the vehicle is equipped with a battery with an op- If the car is to be left inactive for longer ❒ clean and protect the shiny metal parts

DASHBOARD than a month, the following precautions tical indicator, control its charge sta- AND CONTROLS using special compounds readily avail- should be noted: tus every 30 days and if the optical in- able; dicator shows a dark colour without ❒ park the car in covered, dry and if pos- ❒ sprinkle talcum powder on the rubber the central green zone, recharge it; sible well-ventilated premises; SAFETY DEVICES windscreen and rear window wiper ❒ do not drain the engine cooling sys- ❒ engage a gear (position P with auto- blades and lift them off the glass; tem. matic transmission); ❒ slightly open the windows; IMPORTANT Where relevant, switch off ❒ check that the handbrake is not en- ❒ cover the car with a cloth or perfo- the car alarm with the remote control. gaged;

OF THE CAR rated plastic sheet. Do not use sheets CORRECT USE ❒ disconnect battery terminals (first dis- of non-perforated plastic as they do connect the negative terminal); not allow moisture on the car body to evaporate; ❒ if the vehicle is equipped with a bat-

WARNING ❒ MESSAGES inflate tyres to +0,5 bar above the LIGHTS AND tery with an optical indicator, control its charge status. This check is to be normal specified pressure and check it repeated every three months when at intervals; the car is left inactive. Recharge if the

IN AN optical indicator shows a dark colour EMERGENCY without the central green area; CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

144 145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 145

WWAARRNNIINNGG LLIIGGHHTTSS AANNDD MMEESSSSAAGGEESS GENERAL WARNINGS...... 146 GENERIC SIGNALLING ...... 152 DASHBOARD

INSUFFICIENT BRAKE LIQUID ...... 146 ESP SYSTEM FAILURE ...... 154 AND CONTROLS HAND BRAKE ENGAGED ...... 146 HILL HOLDER FAILURE ...... 154 AIR BAG FAILURE...... 146 POSITION LIGHTS AND LOW BEAMS...... 154 SAFETY PASSENGER SIDE FRONT AND SIDE CHEST FOLLOW ME HOME...... 154 DEVICES PROTECTION AIR BAGS (SIDE BAGS) OFF ...... 147 FOG LIGHTS ...... 154 SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED ...... 147 LEFT TURN SIGNAL ...... 154 EXCESSIVE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE ..... 148 RIGHT TURN SIGNAL ...... 154

INSUFFICIENT BATTERY RECHARGING ...... 148 OF THE CAR

HIGH BEAMS...... 155 CORRECT USE ABS SYSTEM FAILURE ...... 148 POSSIBILITY OF ICE ON ROADS...... 155 EBD FAILURE...... 148 LIMITED RANGE ...... 155 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE OIL PRESSURE...... 149 ASR SYSTEM ...... 155 WARNING MESSAGES DEGRADED OIL...... 149 LIGHTS AND AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FAILURE ...... 155 POWER STEERING FAILURE ...... 149 MAXIMUM AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL INCOMPLETE DOOR CLOSURE...... 149 TEMPERATURE ...... 155 INJECTION SYSTEM FAILURE ...... 149 IN AN

SET SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDANCE...... 156 EMERGENCY ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE (EOBD) ...... 149 CONSTANT SPEED REGULATOR FUEL RESERVE ...... 150 (CRUISE CONTROL)...... 156 SPARK PLUG PREHEATING ...... 150 CAR SPARK PLUG PREHEATING FAILURE...... 150 BRAKE PAD WEAR ...... 156 WATER IN DIESEL FILTER...... 151 MINIMUM ENGINE OIL LEVEL ...... 156 MAINTENANCE FIAT CODE - VEHICLE PROTECTION REAR SIDE CHEST PROTECTION AIR BAGS SYSTEM FAILURE ...... 151 (REAR SIDE BAGS) OFF ...... 156

ALARM FAILURE ...... 151 TURNING OFF A MOVING VEHICLE...... 156 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BREAK-IN ATTEMPT ...... 151 STARTING PROCEDURE DISPLAY INFORMATION ELECTRONIC KEY NOT RECOGNISED ...... 151 MESSAGES (AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION)...... 156

EXTERIOR LIGHT FAILURE...... 152 STARTING PROCEDURE DISPLAY INFORMATION INDEX REAR FOG LIGHTS ...... 152 MESSAGES (MANUAL TRANSMISSION) ...... 156 145 145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 146

WARNING LIGHTS LOW BRAKE FLUID Handbrake on AND MESSAGES x LEVEL (red) The warning light turns on when the hand- HANDBRAKE ON (red) brake is on. DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS GENERAL WARNINGS Turning the ignition key to ON the warn- On certain versions, if the car is moving ing light turns on, but it should go off af- the buzzer will also sound. Turning on of warning light is accompa- ter few seconds. nied by specific message and/or by buzzer IMPORTANT If the warning light turns on SAFETY DEVICES sound where provided by instrument pan- when travelling, check that the handbrake el. These indications are concise and is not engaged. cautionary and shall not be considered Low brake fluid level as exhaustive and/or as an alternative to The warning light turns on when the lev- the specifications contained in this Own- el of the brake fluid in the reservoir falls OF THE CAR CORRECT USE er Handbook which shall always be read below the minimum level, due to possi- AIR BAG FAILURE through carefully and thoroughly. In case ble leak in the circuit. of failure indication always refer to the ¬ (red) specifications contained in this sec- The display will show the dedicated mes-

WARNING Turning the ignition key to MESSAGES . sage. ON LIGHTS AND tion the warning light turns on, but it should go IMPORTANT Failure indications displayed off after few seconds. are divided into two categories: very serious and less serious failures. The warning light stays on glowing steadi- IN AN WARNING ly if there is a failure in the air bag system. EMERGENCY Very serious failures are indicated by a x warning “cycle” repeated until failure is If the warning light turns The display will show the dedicated mes- eliminated. on when travelling (on cer- sage. tain versions together with the mes-

CAR Less serious failures are indicated by a lim- sage on the display) stop the car im- ited warning “cycle”.

MAINTENANCE mediately and contact Fiat Dealer- The warning cycle of both failure classes ship. can be stopped by pressing button MODE. The instrument panel warning

TECHNICAL light will stay on until eliminating the fault. SPECIFICATIONS As concerns messages relevant to the versions equipped with Dualogic gearbox, see the attached Supplement. INDEX

146 145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 147

WARNING PASSENGER SIDE SEAT BELTS FRONT AND SIDE NOT FASTENED If when turning the ignition F < key to ON, the warning light CHEST PROTECTION The warning light on the dial AIR BAGS (side bags) DASHBOARD ¬ does not turn on or stays on when turns on glowing steadily with car AND CONTROLS travelling there could be a failure in OFF (amber yellow) stationary and driver’s seat belt not fas- safety systems; in this event air bags Warning light F will come on when de- tened correctly. The warning light will turn or pretensioners could not trigger in on flashing together with the buzzer when,

activating the passenger front air bag and SAFETY case of impact or, in a minor num- side bag (where provided). With passen- with car moving, front seat belts are not DEVICES ber of cases, they could trigger acci- ger front air bag active, turning the igni- fastened correctly. The S.B.R. (Seat Belt Re- dentally. Contact Fiat Dealership im- tion key to ON, warning light F will minder) buzzer can only be excluded by Fi- mediately to have the system turn on with fixed light for about 4 sec- at Dealership. The system can be reacti- checked. onds and then it will flash for other 4 sec- vated through the set-up menu (see dia- OF THE CAR onds. It shall then go off. gram aside). The display will show the ded- CORRECT USE icated message.

WARNING WARNING WARNING MESSAGES The failure of the ¬warning The failure of the warning LIGHTS AND light is also indicated by the light F is indicated by the flashing for more than the normal 4 turning on of warning light ¬. In ad-

seconds of the passenger’s front air dition the air bag system will deacti- IN AN

bag deactivated warning light F . vate automatically the passenger’s air EMERGENCY In addition the air bag system will de- bags (front and side where provided). activate automatically the passen- Contact Fiat Dealership immediately ger’s air bags (front and side where to have the system checked. provided). In this event, warning light CAR

¬ could not indicate safety systems MAINTENANCE failures. Contact Fiat Dealership immediately to have the system checked. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

147 145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 148

HIGH TEMPERATURE ❒ Car heavy duty (e.g.: towing trailer INEFFICIENT ABS ç ENGINE COOLANT uphill of fully laden car): decrease > SYSTEM (amber) FLUID (red) speed, if the warning light stays on,

DASHBOARD stop the car. Wait for 2 or 3 minutes Turning the key to ON the AND CONTROLS Turning the ignition key to ON the warn- leaving the engine on and slightly ac- warning light turns on, but it should go off ing light turns on, but it should go off af- celerated to further activate the cir- after few seconds. culation of the coolant fluid, then ter few seconds. The warning light turns on when the sys-

SAFETY switch the engine off. Check proper DEVICES The warning light turns on when the en- coolant level as described previously. tem is inefficient or unavailable. In this case gine is overheated. the braking system keeps its effectiveness IMPORTANT Under severe use of the unchanged, but without the potential of- car, keep the engine on and slightly accel- fered by the ABS system. Caution is ad- If the warning light comes on when dri- erated for few minutes before switching it visable and it is necessary to contact Fiat

OF THE CAR ving, proceed as follows: CORRECT USE off. Dealership. ❒ normal driving conditions: stop The display will show the dedicated mes- The display will show the dedicated mes- the car, switch off the engine and sage. sage. check whether the water level in the WARNING MESSAGES

LIGHTS AND reservoir is not below the MIN mark. Otherwise wait for few seconds to al- INEFFICIENT low the engine cooling, then open x > EBD slowly and carefully the cap, top up ELECTRONIC

IN AN coolant and check whether its level is BRAKING EMERGENCY falling between MIN and MAX marks LOW BATTERY DISTRIBUTOR (red) (amber) in the reservoir. Check visually any w CHARGE (red) leak. If, when restarting, the warning (where provided) The turning on at the same time of warn- light comes on again, contact a Fiat CAR ing lights x and > with the engine run- Dealership.

MAINTENANCE Turning the key to ON the warning ning indicates an EBD system failure or light turns on, but it should go out as that the system is unavailable; in this case soon as the engine is started (with the heavy braking may cause the rear wheels engine running at idle speed a brief to lock before time, with the possibility of skidding. Drive with the utmost care to TECHNICAL delay in going out is allowed).

SPECIFICATIONS the nearest Fiat Dealership to have the If the warning light stays on contact im- system checked. mediately Fiat Dealership. The display will show the dedicated mes-

INDEX sage.

148 145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 149

LOW ENGINE OIL INJECTION SYSTEM If warning light v flashes, v PRESSURE (red) U FAILURE contact Fiat Dealership im- (Multijet versions - red) mediately to have oil changed Turning the ignition key to ON DASHBOARD the warning light turns on, but it and instrument panel warning light EOBD ENGINE AND CONTROLS should go off after few seconds. turned off. CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE (petrol versions - amber) The display will show the dedicated mes- SAFETY sage. Injection system failure DEVICES Turning the ignition key to ON the warn- POWER STEERING ing light turns on, but it should go off af- FAILURE (red) ter few seconds. WARNING g (where provided) OF THE CAR v If the warning light stays on or turns on CORRECT USE If the warning light when travelling, means a fault in the sup- turns on when travelling to- Turning the ignition key to ON the warning light turns on, but it should go off af- ply/ignition system which could cause high gether with the message on the dis- emissions at the exhaust, possible lack of play, stop the engine immediately ter few seconds. If the warning light stays WARNING performance, poor handling and high con- MESSAGES and contact a Fiat Dealership. on, you will not have steering assistance LIGHTS AND and the effort on the steering wheel will sumption levels. be increased, steering is however possi- On certain versions the dedicated message ble. Contact Fiat Dealership. The dedicat- is displayed. ed message will be displayed. IN AN In these conditions it is possible to con- EMERGENCY EXHAUST OIL tinue driving without however requiring v (Multijet versions) heavy effort or high speed from the en-

INCOMPLETE DOOR gine. In any case, contact Fiat Dealership CAR The warning light with turn on as soon as possible. flashing together with the mes- ´ LOCKING (red) MAINTENANCE sage on the display when the system de- (where provided) tects that the engine oil is exhaust. EOBD ENGINE CONTROL The warning light turns on when SYSTEM FAILURE After the first indication, at each engine one or more doors, the boot or the bon- v Under normal conditions, turning the ig- TECHNICAL

starting the warning light will go on net are not properly shut. The dedicated SPECIFICATIONS flashing for 60 seconds and then for 2 message will be displayed. nition key to ON, the warning light turns hours until oil is changed. on, but it should go off when the engine has When travelling with door/doors, boot or started. In this case, turning on indicates

bonnet open also a buzzer will sound. proper working of the warning light. If the INDEX

149 145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 150

warning light stays on or turns on when GLOW PLUG travelling: If when turning ignition key at ON, the warning light U m WARMING ❒ glowing steadily: means a fault in the does not turn on or if it turns (Multijet versions -

DASHBOARD amber) AND CONTROLS supply/ignition system which could on with fixed light or flashing cause high emissions at the exhaust, (on certain versions together with the GLOW PLUG WARMING possible lack of performance, poor message on the display) when the car handling and high consumption levels. is travelling, contact Fiat Dealership as FAILURE SAFETY DEVICES soon as possible. Warning light U op- (Multijet versions - amber) On certain versions the dedicated mes- eration can by checked by traffic Glow plug warming sage is displayed. agents by proper equipment therefore, In these conditions it is possible to con- comply with laws and regulations in Turning the ignition key to ON the warn- tinue driving without however requiring force in the country where you are dri- ing light turns on and it will go off when

OF THE CAR glow plugs reach the preset temperature. CORRECT USE heavy effort or high speed from the en- ving. gine. Prolonged use of the car with the Start the engine immediately after warn- warning light on may cause damages. Con- ing light turning off. tact Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. FUEL RESERVE IMPORTANT With hot ambient temper- WARNING

MESSAGES The warning light goes off if the fault dis-

LIGHTS AND ature, warning light stays on for very short appears, but it is still stored by the system. ç (amber) time. ❒ flashing: indicates the possibility of Turning the ignition key to ON Glow plug warming failure damage to the catalyst (see “EOBD the warning light comes on but shall go off IN AN system” in section “Dashboard and The warning light turns on when there is

EMERGENCY after few seconds. controls”). a failure in the glow plug warming system. The warning light turns on when about 5 Contact Fiat Dealership as soon as possi- If the light flashes, it is necessary to release litres fuel are left in the tank. ble. the accelerator pedal to lower the speed CAR of the engine until the warning light stops IMPORTANT The warning light flashes to The display will show the dedicated mes-

MAINTENANCE flashing; continue the journey at moder- indicate a failure, contact Fiat Dealership sage. ate speed, trying to avoid driving condi- as soon as possible to have the system tions that may cause further flashing and checked. contact Fiat Dealership as soon as possi-

TECHNICAL ble. SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

150 145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 151

WATER IN DIESEL CAR PROTECTION ALARM FAILURE c FUEL FILTER Y SYSTEM FAILURE - Y (where provided) (Multijet versions - FIAT CODE The turning on of the warning amber) (amber) DASHBOARD light (together with the message AND CONTROLS (where provided) on the display and the buzzer) indicates Turning the ignition key to ON the warn- that there is a failure in the electronic ing light turns on, but it should go off af- Turning the key to ON the warning alarm system. Contact Fiat Dealership as SAFETY ter few seconds. light shall flash only once and then go soon as possible. DEVICES The warning light c turns on when there off. is water in the diesel fuel filter. On certain è If with the ignition key at ON the warn- versions warning light will turn on. ing light comes on with fixed light, this in- BREAK-IN ATTEMPT

dicates a possible failure (see “The Fiat OF THE CAR The display will show the dedicated mes- Y (where provided) CORRECT USE sage. Code system” in section “Dashboard and controls”). The turning on of the warning light (together with the message IMPORTANT The turning on at the same on the display), indicates an attempt of WARNING

U Y MESSAGES The presence of water in the time of the and warning lights in- break-in. LIGHTS AND fuel circuit may cause serious dicates a failure of the Fiat CODE system. damage to the entire injection system and cause irreg- If with the engine running the warning light Y flashes, this means that the car is not ular engine operation. If the warning IN AN protected by the engine inhibitor device ELECTRONIC KEY NOT light c turns on (on certain versions to- EMERGENCY (see “Fiat Code system” in section “Dash- Y RECOGNISED gether with the message on the display) (where provided) contact Fiat Dealership as soon as pos- board and controls”). sible to have the system relieved. If the The turning on of the warning

Contact Fiat Dealership to have all the CAR above indications come on immedi- keys memorised. light (together with the message on the ately after refuelling, water has prob- display and the buzzer) indicates that the MAINTENANCE ably been poured into the tank: turn electronic key being used is not enabled. the engine off immediately and contact Fiat Dealership. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

151 145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 152

EXTERNAL LIGHT GENERIC FAILURE Warning light v turns on W FAILURE (amber) è INDICATION together with the dedicated (amber) message on the display to in-

DASHBOARD The warning light turns on AND CONTROLS dicate that the cleaning pro- when one of the following lights is failing: The warning light turns on in the follow- cedure cannot be performed, contact – side/taillights ing circumstances. Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. – brake lights (third brake light excluded) SAFETY DEVICES – rear fog lights Engine oil pressure sensor failure – direction indicators – number plate lights. The warning light comes on when the en- Inertial fuel cut-off switch gine oil pressure sensor is faulty. Contact intervened The failure referring to these lights could

OF THE CAR Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. CORRECT USE be: one or more blown bulbs, a blown The warning light turns on together with protection fuse or an electric connection The display will show the dedicated mes- the message on the display, when the in- cut-off. sage. ertial fuel cut-off switch is triggered. To reset the fuel cut-off switch, see para-

WARNING The display will show the dedicated mes- MESSAGES LIGHTS AND sage. graph “Power and fuel cut-off switch” in section “Dashboard and controls”. Diesel particulate filter clogged (Multijet versions) IN AN Rain sensor failure EMERGENCY The warning light turns on together with REAR FOG LIGHTS the message on the display and the buzzer The warning light on the dial turns on (on 4 (amber) when the diesel particulate filter is clogged certain versions together with the mes- and the driving conditions do not enable sage on the display) when the rain sensor CAR The warning light turns on to activate automatically the reclaiming is faulty. Contact Fiat Dealership.

MAINTENANCE when the rear fog lights are turned on. procedure. To enable the cleaning procedure, keep the car running until the warning light turns off. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

152 145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 153

Parking sensor failure Check tyre pressure Tyre pressure monitoring system (where provided) (where provided) failure (where provided) The warning light on the dial turns on to- The warning light on the dial turns on (to- The warning light on the dial turns on (to- DASHBOARD

gether with the message on the display gether with the message on the display), gether with the message on the display) AND CONTROLS when failure is detected in parking sensors. when tyre pressure is low or excessive. when a failure is detected in the T.P.M.S. system (where provided). Contact Fiat Dealership. In this case, inflate tyres to the specified SAFETY pressure values (see paragraph “Inflating Contact Fiat Dealership as soon as possi- DEVICES pressures” in section “Technical Specifi- ble. Antipinch system failure cations”). (where provided) Should one or more wheels without sensor be fitted, the instrument panel warn- The warning light on the dial turns on to- Flat tyres (where provided) ing light will come on (together with the OF THE CAR gether with the message on the display message on the display) and stay on until CORRECT USE when failure is detected in the antipinch The warning light on the dial turns on (to- fitting again the four wheels with sensors. system. gether with message on the display and the buzzer), when there is a pressure drop Contact Fiat Dealership. in one or more tyres. In this way the WARNING MESSAGES T.P.M.S. system warns the driver that one LIGHTS AND Twilight sensor failure or more tyre/s is/are flat (i.e. punctured). (where provided) IMPORTANT Stop travelling with one or more flat tyre/s since road holding could IN AN The warning light on the dial turns on (to- be jeopardised. Stop the car without brak- EMERGENCY gether with the message on the display) ing or steering sharply. Change immedi- when failure is detected in twilight sen- ately punctured wheel with space-saver sor (adjusting headlight sensitivity).

spare wheel (where provided - see sec- CAR tion “In an emergency”) and contact Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

153 145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 154

ESP SYSTEM FAILURE SIDE/TAILLIGHTS FRONT FOG LIGHTS á (amber) 3 AND LOW BEAMS 5 (green) (green)

DASHBOARD Turning the ignition key to ON The warning light turns on AND CONTROLS the warning light comes on but shall go off FOLLOW ME HOME when the front fog lights are turned on. after few seconds. (green) SAFETY DEVICES If the warning light does not go off or stays Side/taillights and low beams on when travelling together with the but- LEFT-HAND ton led ASR OFF, contact Fiat Dealer- The warning light turns on when side/tail- F DIRECTION ship. lights or low beams are turned on. INDICATOR (green - intermittent) Follow me home OF THE CAR

CORRECT USE The display will show the dedicated message. The warning light will turn when this de- The warning light turns on when the di- vice is active (see “Follow me home” in rection indicator control lever is moved Note Warning light flashing when driving section “Dashboard and controls”). downwards or, together with the right indicator, when the hazard warning light WARNING indicates that the ESP system is active. MESSAGES LIGHTS AND The display will show the dedicated mes- button is pressed. sage.

RIGHT-HAND

IN AN HILL HOLDER FAILURE DIRECTION EMERGENCY (amber) D á INDICATOR (green - Turning the ignition key to ON intermittent) the warning light comes on but shall go off CAR after few seconds. The warning light turns on when the di-

MAINTENANCE rection indicator control lever is moved The warning light will turn on when the upwards or, together with the left indica- Hill Holder system is faulty. Contact Fiat tor, when the hazard warning light button Dealership as soon as possible. is pressed. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS The display will show the dedicated message. INDEX

154 145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 155

MAIN BEAMS (blue) LIMITED RANGE AUTOMATIC 1 (versions with reconfigurable t TRANSMISSION The warning light turns on multifunction display) FAILURE

when the main beams are DASHBOARD turned on. Turning the ignition key to ON, AND CONTROLS The display will show the dedicated mes- the warning light on the dial shall turn on sage to warn the driver that the cruising and then go off after a few seconds. range is less than 50 km. SAFETY The warning light (together with the mes- DEVICES POSSIBLE PRESENCE OF ICE ASR SYSTEM (versions with recon- sage o the display and the warning buzzer) ON THE ROAD figurable multifunction display) flashes to indicate a transmission failure. (versions with reconfigurable multifunction display) The ASR system can be turned off by pressing the button ASR OFF. OF THE CAR CORRECT USE This indication starts flashing when the The display will show the dedicated mes- outside temperature reaches or falls be- sage to warn the driver that the system low 3°C to warn the driver of the possi- is off; at the same time the button led will Contact immediately Fiat ble presence of ice on the road. turn on. Dealership in case of trans- WARNING MESSAGES mission failure to have the LIGHTS AND The display will show the dedicated mes- Pressing again button ASR OFF will turn system checked. sage. off the button led and the display will show the dedicated message to warn the driver that the system is active again. IN AN EMERGENCY HIGH GEARBOX OIL t TEMPERATURE

The warning light comes on CAR

(together with the message o the MAINTENANCE display and the warning buzzer) glowing steadily to indicate that the temperature of the automatic transmission oil is too

high. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

155 145-156 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:21 Pagina 156

Should the warning light turn LOW ENGINE OIL ENGINE OFF WHEN RUNNING on glowing steadily, reduce en- k LEVEL Message is displayed when the engine is gine perormance and contact The warning light (if any) on the turned off at a speed higher than 10 km/h; DASHBOARD

AND CONTROLS immediately Fiat Dealership. dial comes on together with the steering lock is disabled. message on the display and the buzzer To restore the function, turn the ignition when the engine oil level falls below the key to ON and then to OFF again with minimum level. Restore proper oil level SAFETY

DEVICES the car stopped. SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED (see “Checking levels” in section “Car The display will show the dedicated mes- maintenance”). sage and the buzzer will sound when the car Turning the ignition key to ON the warn- STARTING PROCEDURE exceeds the speed limit set previously (see ing light on the dial turns on but it should MESSAGES “Reconfigurable Multifunction Display” in (automatic transmission)

OF THE CAR go off after few seconds. CORRECT USE section “Dashboard and controls”). Starting procedure messages shown on the display when reaching position ON with enabled key. WARNING MESSAGES

LIGHTS AND REAR SIDE CHEST CRUISE CONTROL PROTECTION AIR STARTING PROCEDURE (where provided) À Ü BAGS (Rear Side Bags) MESSAGES (manual transmission) The warning light turns on to- OFF (where provided) IN AN Starting procedure messages shown on

EMERGENCY gether with the message on the Warning light À turns on when the rear display when turning the knurled ring of the display when reaching position ON side chest protection air bags are turned with enabled key. the Cruise Control to ON. off (Rear Side Bags) (where provided). With the air bags on, by turning the key CAR to the ON position, the warning light À MAINTENANCE BRAKE PAD WEAR will turn on with a stationary light for ap- (where provided) prox. 4 seconds, then flash for the next 4 d seconds, after which it will turn off. The warning light on the dial TECHNICAL turns on (together with the mes- SPECIFICATIONS sage on the display) if the front brake pads are worn; in this case have them changed as soon as possible. INDEX

156 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 157

IINN AANN EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY AND

STARTUP WITH AN AUXILIARY BATTERY ...... 158 CONTROLS DASHBOARD COASTING STARTUP ...... 159 CHANGING A WHEEL ...... 159 SAFETY FIX & GO AUTOMATIC RAPID TYRE REPAIR KIT .. 165 DEVICES CHANGING A LAMP...... 169 CHANGING AN EXTERIOR LAMP ...... 173

CHANGING AN INTERIOR LAMP...... 178 OF THE CAR CORRECT USE FUSE REPLACEMENT...... 181 BATTERY RECHARGING ...... 190 WARNING MESSAGES

VEHICLE LIFTING ...... 190 LIGHTS AND VEHICLE TOWING ...... 191 IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE S TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX

157 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 158

JUMP STARTING Under no circumstances should a battery charger be

AND If the battery is flat, it is possible to start used to start the engine: it

DASHBOARD the engine using an auxiliary battery with could damage the electronic the same capacity or a little higher than systems and in particular the ignition the flat one. and injection control units. Proceed as follows fig. 1: SAFETY DEVICES ❒ Connect positive terminals (+ near

the terminal) of the two batteries with F0L0127m a jump lead; fig. 1 ❒ With a second lead, connect the neg- If after a few attempts the engine does not OF THE CAR WARNING CORRECT USE ative terminal (–) of the auxiliary bat- E start, do not insist but contact the near- tery and to an earthing point on the est Fiat Dealership. Do not carry out this proce- engine or the gearbox of the car to be dure if you lack experience; if started; IMPORTANT Do not directly connect the it is not done correctly it can cause

WARNING negative terminals of the two batteries: MESSAGES very intense electrical discharges. In LIGHTS AND ❒ Start the engine; sparks could ignite the flammable gas from addition, the fluid contained in the ❒ When the engine has been started, re- the battery. If the other battery is fitted in battery is poisonous and corrosive. move the leads reversing the order another car, prevent accidental contacts Avoid contact with skin and eyes. You

IN AN above. between the metal parts of the two cars. are also advised not to put naked

EMERGENCY flames or lighted cigarettes near the battery and not to cause sparks. CAR TECHNICAL INDEX

158 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 159

BUMP STARTING IF A TYRE IS WARNING PUNCTURED The space-saver spare wheel Never bump start the engine (by pushing, is specific to your car, do not AND CONTROLS towing, or coasting downhill) as this could use it on other models, or use the DASHBOARD cause fuel to flow into the catalytic ex- GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS spare wheel of other models on your haust system and damage it beyond repair. Wheel changing and correct use of the car. The space-saver spare wheel Remember that the brake booster and the shall only be used in an emergency.

jack and space-saver spare wheel call for SAFETY power steering system are not operating some precautions as listed below. It shall only be used for the distance DEVICES until the engine is started, a greater effort necessary to reach a service point and will therefore be required to press the the car speed shall not exceed 80 brake pedal or to turn the steering wheel. Km/h. The spare wheel has an orange sticker that summarises the main cau-

WARNING tions for use and limitations. The OF THE CAR CORRECT USE Alert other drivers that the sticker should never be removed or car is stationary in compli- covered. ance with local regulations: hazard Never fit a wheel cap on a space- saver spare wheel. The sticker gives WARNING warning lights, warning triangle etc. MESSAGES Any passengers on board should leave the following information in four lan- LIGHTS AND the car, especially if it is heavily laden. guages: caution! For temporary use Passengers should stay away from on- only! 80 km/h max! Replace by normal wheel as soon as possible. Do not coming traffic while the wheel is be- IN AN cover this label. ing changed on. If the wheel is being EMERGENCY changed on a steep or badly surfaced road, place the wedges or other suitable material under the wheel to stop the car. CAR MAINTENANCE S TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX

159 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 160

WARNING WARNING WARNING When driving with a space- The jack shall only be used Fasten the wheel cap cor- AND saver spare wheel fitted, the for changing wheels on the rectly to prevent the wheel

DASHBOARD driving performance of the car car with which it is provided or on from coming free in motion. Never changes. Avoid accelerating or brak- cars of the same model. tamper with the inflation valve. Nev- ing sharply, abrupt turns or fast cor- It must not be used for other purpos- er place tools between the rim and nerings. The life of the spare wheel es such as for instance raising cars of tyre. Check and restore, if required, SAFETY DEVICES is approx. 3000 Km, after this dis- other models. In no case should it be the pressure of tyres and spare wheel tance it should be replaced with an- used for repairs under the car. Incor- to the values given in section “Tech- other of the same type. Never at- rect positioning of the jack may cause nical Specifications”. tempt to fit a conventional tyre on a the jacked car to fall. Do not use the rim designed for use as a space-saver jack for higher capacities than stated

OF THE CAR spare wheel. Have the punctured on its label. Snow chains cannot be CORRECT USE wheel repaired and refitted as soon fitted to the space-saver spare wheel. as possible. Two or more space-saver So, if a front (drive) wheel is punc- spare wheels should never be used to- tured and chains are needed, a rear gether. Do not grease the threads of wheel should be fitted to the front of WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND bolts before installing them: they the car and the spare wheel should be might slip out. fitted to the rear. This way with two normal drive wheels, snow chains can be fitted to them to solve an emer- IN AN gency. EMERGENCY CAR TECHNICAL INDEX

160 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 161 AND CONTROLS DASHBOARD SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 2 F0L0239m fig. 3 F0L0240m fig. 4 F0L0218m

Please note: To change a wheel proceed as follows: ❒ Lift the luggage compartment panel OF THE CAR mat CORRECT USE ❒ the jack weight is 1,76 kg; ❒ Stop the car in a position that is not ❒ ❒ dangerous for oncoming traffic where Make the wire secured under the the jack requires no adjustment; you can change the wheel safely. The loading surface (where provided), pass ❒ ground should be flat and adequately through the proper slot secured to WARNING the jack cannot be repaired. If it breaks MESSAGES it must be replaced with a new jack; firm; the boot shelf mat and fasten both to LIGHTS AND ❒ ❒ the hook on the upper roof, as shown no tool other than its cranking device Turn the engine off and pull up the in fig. 3; may be fitted on the jack. handbrake; ❒ IN AN ❒ Loosen the fastener A-fig. 4; Engage first gear or reverse (position EMERGENCY P with automatic transmission); ❒ Use the special handle to lift the load

surface (where provided), as shown in CAR fig. 2; MAINTENANCE S TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX

161 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 162 AND DASHBOARD

D SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 5 F0L0219m fig. 6 F0L0370m fig. 7 F0L0366m

❒ take out the space-saver spare wheel Note Before replacing the drilled wheel ❒ loosen the bolts of the wheel to be re- OF THE CAR CORRECT USE B-fig. 4 to access the tool container (if in alloy) in the specific housing, remo- placed by about one turn with the C-fig. 5; ve the snap-in logo holder pressing on it wrench provided E-fig. 7; if the car from the its internal side. is fitted with alloy rims, shake the car ❒ take out the tool container C-fig. 5 ❒ to facilitate removing this rim from the

WARNING and take it near to the wheel to be For vehicles with steel rims, remove MESSAGES

LIGHTS AND wheel hub; changed; the pressure inserted wheel hub cap D-fig. 6; ❒ remove the spacer set under the space-saver spare wheel to house the IN AN standard size wheel. EMERGENCY IMPORTANT: failing to observe this prescription could cause boot floor breaking. CAR TECHNICAL INDEX

162 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 163 AND CONTROLS DASHBOARD SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 8 F0L0367m fig. 9 F0L0188m

❒ operate the device F-fig. 8 to extend ❒ make sure the contact surfaces be- ❒ use the wrench provided to fasten the OF THE CAR the jack until the top of the jack G- tween spare wheel and hub are clean bolts completely in a criss-cross fash- CORRECT USE fig. 8 fits correctly into catch H- so that the fastening bolts will not ion as shown in fig. 9. fig. 8; come loose; ❒ ❒

warn anybody nearby that the car is using the wrench provided, fully tight- WARNING MESSAGES about to be lifted. They must stay clear en the five fastening bolts; LIGHTS AND and not touch the car until it is back ❒ on the ground; turn the jack handle L-fig. 8 to lower the car and remove the jack; ❒ fit the handle L-fig. 8 to operate the IN AN jack and lift the car until the wheel to EMERGENCY be changed is several centimetres off the ground; CAR MAINTENANCE S TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX

163 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 164

REFITTING THE STANDARD WHEEL

AND 5 Following the procedure described previ- 3 DASHBOARD ously, raise the car and remove the spare 2 wheel. 4 1 For versions with steel rim SAFETY DEVICES Proceed as follows: ❒ make sure the contact surfaces be- fig. 10 F0L0368m fig. 11 F0L0219m tween standard wheel and hub are clean so that the fastening bolts will For versions with alloy rims When you have finished OF THE CAR CORRECT USE not come loose; ❒ Insert the wheel on the hub and, using ❒ Place the spacer. ❒ fit the standard wheel by inserting the the wrench provided, tighten the ❒ first bolt for two threads into the hole bolts. Fit the jack partially open in its con- closest to the inflation valve; tainer C-fig. 11 forcing it lightly to WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND ❒ Lower the car and remove the jack. prevent it from vibrating when travel- ❒ using the wrench provided, tighten the ling. fastening bolts; ❒ Using the wrench provided, fully tighten the bolts in the sequence shown ❒ Put the tools back into their places in ❒ lower the car and remove the jack; IN AN in fig. 10; the container.

EMERGENCY ❒ using the wrench provided, fully tight- ❒ insert the logo holder by pressing on en the bolts in the sequence shown the exterior side. previously; CAR ❒ fit the wheel cap making the groove (on the wheel cap) coincide with the inflation valve. TECHNICAL INDEX

164 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 165

QUICK TYRE REPAIR KIT FIX & GO AND CONTROLS

automatic DASHBOARD

The quick tyre repair kit Fix & Go automatic is located in the appropriate con- SAFETY tainer in the boot . DEVICES The quick tyre repair kit includes fig. 13: fig. 12 F0L0218m fig. 13 F0L0393m ❒ bottle A containing sealer and fitted with: ❒ Stow the container C-fig. 11, com- OF THE CAR

WARNING CORRECT USE plete with tools in the boot. – filler hose B Hand the instruction ❒ Place the space-saver spare wheel B- – sticker C with caution “max. 80 brochure to the personnel fig. 12 in the space provided for the km/h”, to be affixed in a visible posi- charged with treating the tyre re- tion for the driver (instrument panel)

purpose inside the boot and secure it WARNING paired with the kit. MESSAGES with the clamping device A-fig. 12. after repairing the tyre LIGHTS AND ❒ instruction brochure (see fig. 14), to be used for prompt and proper use of

the quick repair kit and to be then IN AN

handed to the personnel charged with In the event of a puncture EMERGENCY handling the treated tyre caused by foreign bodies, it is possible to repair tyres show- ❒ compressor D including gauge and con-

ing damages on the track or CAR nections shoulder up to max 4 mm diameter. ❒ a pair of protection gloves located in MAINTENANCE the side space of the compressor

❒ adapters for inflating different elements. S TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX

165 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 166

IT SHOULD BE NOTICED THAT: WARNING The sealing fluid of the quick tyre repair The cylinder contains ethyl- AND kit is effective with external temperatures ene glycol. The cylinder con-

DASHBOARD between –20 °C and +50 °C. tains latex: it can cause allergic re- actions. It is harmful if ingested or in- haled and irritant for the eyes and in case of contact. In case of contact SAFETY DEVICES WARNING rinse immediately with water and The compressor shall not be take off contaminated clothes. If fig. 14 F0L0394m operated for more than 20 swallowed, do not induce vomit, rinse minutes. Risk of overheating!. Tyres out the mouth, drink a lot of water repaired with the quick tyre repair kit and call the doctor immediately.

OF THE CAR WARNING Keep away from children. This prod- CORRECT USE shall be used temporarily only. Holes and damages on the uct must not be used by asthmatics. tyre side walls cannot be re- Do not inhale vapours. Call the doc- paired. Do not use the quick tyre re- tor immediately in case of allergic re- actions. Keep the cylinder in the WARNING MESSAGES pair kit if damaging is due to running LIGHTS AND with flat tyre. space provided for the purpose and far from heat. The sealing fluid has limited life. Replace the cylinder if sealer has run out. IN AN Do not throw away the cylin-

EMERGENCY der and the sealing fluid. WARNING Have the sealing fluid and the cylinder disposed of in com- Repairs are not possible in

CAR pliance with national and local regu- case of damages on the lations. wheel rim (bad groove distortion causing air loss). Do not remove foreign bodies (screws or nails) from the tyre. TECHNICAL INDEX

166 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 167 AND

D CONTROLS DASHBOARD SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 15 F0L0530m fig. 16 F0L0533m fig. 17 F0L0396m

INFLATING PROCEDURE ❒ make sure the compressor switch ❒ If after 5 minutes it is still impossible OF THE CAR E-fig. 17 is set to 0 (off), start the en- to reach at least 1.5 bar, disengage com- CORRECT USE gine and fit plug D-fig. 16 into the cig- pressor from valve and current outlet, ar lighter outlet and then turn on the then move the car forth for approx. ten WARNING compressor by setting switch E-fig. 17 metres in order to distribute the seal- WARNING MESSAGES Put on the protection gloves to I (on). Inflate the tyre to the pres- ing fluid inside the tyre evenly, then re- LIGHTS AND provided together with quick sure specified in paragraph “Cold tyre peat the inflation operation; tyre repair kit. inflation pressure” in section “Techni- ❒ cal specifications”. Check tyre pressure If after this operation it is still impossi- on gauge F-fig. 17 with compressor off ble after 5 minutes to reach at least 1.8 IN AN

to obtain precise reading; bar, do not start driving since the tyre EMERGENCY is excessively damaged and the quick ❒ Pull up the handbrake. Loosen tyre tyre repair kit cannot guarantee suitable sealing, contact Fiat Dealership; inflation valve cap, take out the filler CAR hose A-fig. 15 and screw the ring nut ❒ If reaching the tyre pressure specified B on the tyre valve; in paragraph “Cold tyre inflation pres- MAINTENANCE sure” in section “Technical specifica-

tions”, start driving immediately; S TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX

167 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 168

WARNING If the pressure falls below 1.8 AND bars, do not drive any fur-

DASHBOARD ther: the quick tyre repair kit Fix & Go automatic cannot guarantee proper hold because the tyre is too much damaged. Contact Fiat Dealership. SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 18 F0L0531m fig. 19 F0L0532m

❒ if at least 1.8 bar pressure is read, re- FOR CHECKING AND OF THE CAR WARNING CORRECT USE store proper pressure (with engine RESTORING PRESSURE ONLY Apply the sticker in a visible running and handbrake on) and restart; position for the driver to in- The compressor can be also used just for dicate that the tyre has been treat- ❒ drive with the utmost care to the near- restoring pressure. Disconnect the quick

WARNING est Fiat Dealership. MESSAGES ed with the quick tyre repair kit. Dri- connection and connect it directly to the LIGHTS AND ve carefully especially when corner- tyre valve fig. 19; in this way the cylinder ing. Do not exceed 80 km/h. Avoid is not connected to compressor and the heavy braking and accelerating. sealing fluid will not flow into the tyre. IN AN

EMERGENCY WARNING It is of vital importance to ❒ after driving for about 10 minutes stop communicate that the tyre CAR and check again the tyre pressure; pull has been repaired using the quick tyre up the handbrake; repair kit. Hand the instruction brochure to the personnel charged with treating the tyre repaired with the kit. TECHNICAL INDEX

168 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 169

WHEN NEEDING TO Halogen bulbs must be han- CHANGE A BULB dled touching only the metallic part. If the transparent bulb AND CONTROLS

is touched with the fingers, its DASHBOARD GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS lighting intensity is reduced and life of ❒ the bulb may be compromised. If When a light is not working, check touched accidentally, rub the bulb with

that the corresponding fuse is intact SAFETY a cloth moistened with alcohol and al- DEVICES before changing a bulb. For the loca- low to dry. tion of fuses, refer to the paragraph “If fig. 20 F0L0398m a fuse blows” in this section; ❒ Before changing a bulb check the con- CYLINDER REPLACEMENT OF THE CAR

tacts for oxidation; CORRECT USE PROCEDURE ❒ Burnt bulbs must be replaced by oth- WARNING To replace the cylinder proceed as fol- ers of the same type and power; lows: Modifications or repairs to ❒ the electrical system (elec-

Always check the height of the head- WARNING MESSAGES

❒ LIGHTS AND disconnect connection B-fig. 20; light beam after changing a bulb. tronic control units) carried out in- ❒ turn counter-clockwise the cylinder to correctly and without bearing the fea- replace and raise it; tures of the system in mind can cause malfunctions with the risk of fire. ❒ fit the new cylinder and turn it clock- IN AN wise; EMERGENCY ❒ connect connection B to the cylinder

and fit the transparent tube A into the CAR proper space. WARNING MAINTENANCE Halogen bulbs contain pres- surised gas which, if broken, may cause small fragments of glass to S

be projected outwards. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX

169 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 170

WARNING TYPES OF BULBS fig. 21 Due to high voltage, the bulb Various types of bulbs are fitted to your AND of (Xenon) gas-discharge car:

DASHBOARD headlights must only be replaced by A Glass bulbs: clipped into position. Pull experts: danger of death! Contact Fi- to remove. at Dealership. B Bayonet type bulbs: press the bulb, SAFETY DEVICES turn counterclockwise to remove this type of bulb from its holder. C Tubular bulbs: release them from their contacts to remove. IMPORTANT The headlight inner surface OF THE CAR CORRECT USE may be lightly misted over: this is not a D-E Halogen bulbs: to remove the bulb, fault but a natural fact due to low tem- release the clip holding the bulb in perature and the level of air humidity. It place. will disappear as soon the headlights are F Gas-discharge bulbs (Xenon). WARNING MESSAGES

LIGHTS AND turned on. The presence of drops inside the headlights means water infiltration, therefore contact Fiat Dealership. IN AN EMERGENCY CAR TECHNICAL

fig. 21 F0L0072m INDEX

170 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 171

Bulbs Ref. Figure Type Power

Main beam headlights E H1 55W AND CONTROLS DASHBOARD Dipped beam headlights D H7 55W

Gas-discharge dipped beam headlights (where provided) F D2R 35W SAFETY DEVICES Longlife front sidelights (2 per light) A W5W 5W

Front fog lights (where provided) E H1 55W OF THE CAR

Front direction indicators B PY24W 24W CORRECT USE

Side direction indicators A WY5W 5W WARNING Rear direction indicators B R10W 10W MESSAGES LIGHTS AND

Taillights/brake lights B P21/5W 21W/5W

Third brake light (additional brake light) A W2,3W 2,3W IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE S TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX

171 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 172

Bulbs Ref. Figure Type Power

AND Reversing light B P21W 21W DASHBOARD Rear fog lights B P21W 21W

Number plate lights C C5W 5W SAFETY DEVICES Puddle / door lights A W5W 5W

Front roof light C C5W 5W OF THE CAR

CORRECT USE Rear roof light C C10W 10W

Glovebox light C C5W 5W WARNING MESSAGES Boot light A W5W 5W LIGHTS AND

Sun visor lights C C5W 5W IN AN EMERGENCY CAR TECHNICAL INDEX

172 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 173

IF AN EXTERIOR LIGHT BURNS OUT AND CONTROLS For the type of bulb and power rating, see DASHBOARD “When needing to change a bulb”.

FRONT LIGHT UNITS fig. 22 SAFETY DEVICES The front light units contain the side/taillights, dipped beam, main beam and di- fig. 22 F0L0399m fig. 23 F0L0402m rection indicator bulbs. The bulbs are arranged inside the light unit DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS Gas-discharge lamps (Bi-Xenon) OF THE CAR as follows: (where provided) CORRECT USE A Sidelights / main beam headlights; Gas-filled filament lamps B Dipped beam headlights; To change the bulb, proceed as follows: WARNING

WARNING MESSAGES ❒ remove the protective cover B-fig. 22; LIGHTS AND C Direction indicators. Due to high voltage, the bulb ❒ release the bulb holder catch A-fig. 23; of (Bi-Xenon) gas-discharge ❒ headlights must only be replaced by disconnect the electric connector B; experts: danger of death! Contact Fi- IN AN

❒ remove the bulb C and replace it; at Dealership. EMERGENCY ❒ fit the new bulb, making the tabs of the metallic part coincide with the grooves on the reflector, reconnect the electri- CAR

cal connector B then hook the bulb MAINTENANCE holder catch A;

❒ refit the protective cover A-fig. 22 S correctly. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX

173 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 174 AND DASHBOARD SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 24 F0L0403m fig. 25 F0L0404m fig. 26 F0L0405m

OF THE CAR SIDELIGHTS MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS DIRECTION INDICATORS CORRECT USE To change the bulb, proceed as follows: To change the bulb, proceed as follows: Front ❒ remove the protective cover A-fig. 22; ❒ remove the protective cover A-fig. 22; To change the bulb, proceed as follows: WARNING MESSAGES ❒ ❒ ❒ LIGHTS AND turn the bulb holder A-fig. 24 coun- release the bulb holder catch A-fig. 25; turn the protective cover C-fig. 22 terclockwise and then withdraw it; ❒ remove the bulb C and replace it; counterclockwise; ❒ remove the bulb B and replace it; ❒ ❒ fit the new bulb, making the tabs of the remove the bulb B-fig. 26 and replace

IN AN ❒ fit the new bulb, refit the bulb holder metallic part coincide with the grooves it;

EMERGENCY A-fig. 24 and then refit the protective on the reflector, reconnect the electri- ❒ refit the protective cover A correctly. cover B-fig. 22 correctly. cal connector B then hook the bulb holder catch A;

CAR ❒ refit the protective cover B-fig. 22 correctly. TECHNICAL INDEX

174 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 175 AND CONTROLS DASHBOARD SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 27 F0L0520m fig. 28 F0L0534m fig. 29 F0L0083m

Side fig. 19 FRONT FOG LIGHTS fig. 28 REAR LIGHT UNITS OF THE CAR CORRECT USE To change the bulb, proceed as follows: (where provided) Tailgate light unit ❒ lever in the point shown by the arrow Contact Fiat Dealership to have front fog to compress the catch and remove the lights replaced. To change the bulb, proceed as follows: WARNING MESSAGES unit A; ❒ open the tailgate; LIGHTS AND ❒ turn the bulb holder B counterclock- ❒ push down cover A-fig. 29 and re- wise, remove the snap-fitted bulb and move electric connectorB-fig. 30;

replace it; IN AN

❒ refit the bulb holder B in the trans- EMERGENCY parent cover, then position the unit making sure the catch clicks into place. CAR MAINTENANCE S TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX

175 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 176 AND DASHBOARD SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 30 F0L0084m fig. 31 F0L0080m fig. 32 F0L0085m

❒ push the bulb holder side tabs C-fig. The bulbs are arranged inside the light unit Side fixed light unit OF THE CAR CORRECT USE 31 inwards to remove it; as follows (fig. 31): To change the bulb, proceed as follows: ❒ remove bulbs slightly pushing them D reversing lights; ❒ and turning counterclockwise. open the tailgate; E rear fog lights. ❒ WARNING MESSAGES loosen the two screws F-fig. 32 and LIGHTS AND remove the light unit; ❒ remove the electrical connector; IN AN EMERGENCY CAR TECHNICAL INDEX

176 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 177

❒ remove the snap-fitted bulbs and change them;

❒ refit the bulb holder making sure AND CONTROLS catches B-fig. 34 click into place. DASHBOARD SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 33 F0L0081m fig. 34 F0L0190m

❒ press the bulb holder tab G-fig. 33 to ADDITIONAL BRAKING LIGHT OF THE CAR remove it; (THIRD STOP) CORRECT USE ❒ remove bulbs slightly pushing them To change the bulb, proceed as follows: and turning counterclockwise. ❒ open the tailgate; WARNING MESSAGES The bulbs are arranged inside the light unit ❒ LIGHTS AND as follows (fig. 33): remove the snap-fitted cover; ❒ H taillights / brake lights; press catches B-fig. 34 and remove the bulb holder; I direction indicators. IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE S TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX

177 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 178

IF AN INTERIOR LIGHT BURNS OUT AND

DASHBOARD For the type of bulb and power rating, see “When needing to change a bulb”. SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 36 F0L0079m fig. 37 F0L0086m

NUMBER PLATE LIGHT fig. 36 FRONT CEILING LIGHT OF THE CAR CORRECT USE To change the bulb, proceed as follows: fig. 37-38 ❒ work in the point shown by the arrow To change the bulb, proceed as follows: and remove lens A; ❒ work in the points shown by the ar- WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND ❒ change the bulb B releasing it from the rows and remove cover A; side contacts and making sure the new ❒ turn the 2 bulb holders B counter- bulb is correctly fastened between the clockwise, remove and replace bulbs;

IN AN contacts;

EMERGENCY ❒ refit the lens. CAR TECHNICAL INDEX

178 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 179 AND CONTROLS DASHBOARD SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 38 F0L0087m fig. 39 F0L0088m fig. 40 F0L0202m

❒ to replace the bulb C, release it from COURTESY MIRROR LIGHT GLOVEBOX LIGHT fig. 40 OF THE CAR CORRECT USE the side contacts making sure that the fig. 39 To change the bulb, proceed as follows: new bulb is correctly clamped between the contacts. To change the bulb, proceed as follows: ❒ open the glovebox, remove the light ❒ open the mirror cover A; unit A levering in the point shown by WARNING MESSAGES the arrow; LIGHTS AND ❒ remove the bulb B levering in the points shown by the arrows; ❒ replace the bulb releasing it from the side contacts making sure that the new ❒ replace the bulb releasing it from the bulb is correctly clamped between the IN AN side contacts making sure that the new contacts. EMERGENCY bulb is correctly clamped between the contacts. CAR MAINTENANCE S TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX

179 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 180 AND DASHBOARD SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 41 F0L0089m fig. 42 F0L0090m fig. 43 F0L0180m

BOOT LIGHT ❒ open the protection B-fig. 42 and re- PUDDLE / DOOR LIGHTS fig. 43 OF THE CAR CORRECT USE place the snap-fitted bulb; To change the bulb, proceed as follows: To change the bulb, proceed as follows: ❒ ❒ re-close the protective cover B- ❒ open the tailgate; fig. 42 on the transparent; open the door and remove the trans- ❒ parent cover A levering in the point WARNING MESSAGES remove the light unit A-fig. 41 lever- LIGHTS AND ❒ refit the light unit A-fig. 41 inserting shown by the arrow; ing in the point shown by the arrow. it in its correct position firstly on one ❒ end and then on the other until it open the protection B and replace the clicks into place. snap-fitted bulb; IN AN ❒ re-close the protective cover B on the EMERGENCY transparent cover A. CAR TECHNICAL INDEX

180 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 181

IF A FUSE BLOWS AND

GENERAL fig. 45 CONTROLS DASHBOARD The fuse is a protective device for the electric system: it comes into action (i.e. it cuts off) mainly due to a fault or im- SAFETY proper action on the system. DEVICES When a device does not work, check the fig. 44 F0L0091m efficiency of its fuse: the conductor ele- fig. 45 F0L0092m ment A must be intact. If not, replace the SIDE REAR CEILING LIGHTS fuse with one of the same amp rating WARNING OF THE CAR fig. 44 (same colour). CORRECT USE If a fuse switches off again, To change the bulb, proceed as follows: B undamaged fuse contact the Fiat Service Net- work . ❒ remove the light unit A levering in the C fuse with damaged filament. WARNING MESSAGES point shown by the arrow; To replace a fuse, use the pliers D hooked LIGHTS AND ❒ replace the bulb B releasing it from to the fusebox on the dashboard. the side contacts making sure that the

new bulb is correctly clamped be- IN AN

tween the contacts. EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE S TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX

181 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 182

Never replace a fuse with met- WARNING FUSE LOCATION al wires or anything else. If a general fuse (MEGA- The vehicle’s fuses are grouped in three AND FUSE, MIDI-FUSE, MAXI- central units that are located on the in-

DASHBOARD FUSE) cuts in, do not attempt any re- strument dashboard, in the engine com- pair and contact a Fiat Dealership. partment and inside the boot (left side). On the battery’s positive pole there is a

SAFETY fourth control unit that contains large ca- DEVICES WARNING pacity fuses (MEGA-FUSE, MIDI-FUSE, Never change a fuse with MAXI-FUSE). another with a higher amp Before replacing a fuse, make rating, DANGER OF FIRE. sure the ignition key has been removed and that all the oth- OF THE CAR

CORRECT USE er services are switched off and/or disengaged. WARNING To replace these fuses, contact the Fiat Service Net- WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND work. IN AN EMERGENCY CAR TECHNICAL INDEX

182 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 183

Fuse box on the dashboard fig. 46-47

To gain access to the fuses in the fuse box AND CONTROLS on the dashboard, loosen the fastening DASHBOARD screw A and remove the cover. SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 46 F0L0145m OF THE CAR CORRECT USE WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE S TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX fig. 47 F0L0093m 183 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 184

Fuse box in engine compartment fig. 48-49

AND To gain access to the fuses in the fuse box DASHBOARD next to the battery, remove the protection cover. SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 48 F0L0094m OF THE CAR CORRECT USE WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND IN AN EMERGENCY CAR TECHNICAL INDEX fig. 49 F0L0095m 184 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 185

Fuse box in the boot fig. 50-51 To gain access to the fuse box located on the left side of boot open the relevant AND CONTROLS door (as shown in the figure). DASHBOARD SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 50 F0L0217m OF THE CAR CORRECT USE WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE S TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX fig. 51 F0L0213m 185 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 186

FUSE SUMMARY TABLE Fuse box on dashboard AND

DASHBOARD USERS FUSE AMPERE RH low beam F 12 15 LH low beam - Light stability corrector F 13 15 SAFETY DEVICES +15 excluded during ignition for dashboard control unit relay coils / engine compartment and Body computer F 31 7.5 +30 nodes front driver and passenger doors (door lock), TEG reader F 32 15 Boot compartment node power supply (rear left power window) F 33 20 OF THE CAR CORRECT USE Boot compartment node power supply (rear right power window) F 34 20 +15 backing lights, supplementary heater control unit, flow gauge, water in diesel fuel sensor, NC switch on brake pedal F 35 7.5 WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND +30 boot compartment node (rear door locks) F 36 20 +15 instrument panel, control unit on gas discharge headlamps, NA switch on brake pedal, supplementary stop light F 37 10 IN AN

EMERGENCY Boot opening actuator F 38 15 +30 EOBD diagnostic socket , central front ceiling light, rear side ceiling lights, siren F 39 10 and volumetric sensor control unit for the antitheft system, tyre pressure control unit, CAR air conditioning control unit, Blue-tooth control unit Heated rear window F 40 30 Windscreen / rear window washer nozzle demisters F 41 7.5 +15 ABS / ESP control unit, electrohydraulic driving node, yaw sensor , steering TECHNICAL angle sensor F 42 7.5 +15 excluded during ignition for electronic column switch module (windscreen wipers, windscreen / rear window washer pump) F 43 30 INDEX +15 excluded during ignition for cigar lighter, current outlet on tunnel F 44 20 186 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 187

USERS FUSE AMPERE Sun roof engine control unit power supply F 45 20 AND

Sun roof visor engine control unit power supply F 46 CONTROLS 20 DASHBOARD Front driver door node power supply (front driver power window) F 47 20 Front passenger door node power supply (front passenger power window) F 48 20 SAFETY +15 volumetric sensor control unit for antitheft device, emergency control display DEVICES plaque lights / Blue-tooth and roof visor on roof panel / driver and passenger front seat console, driver side control dashboard lights / tunnel, DVD player presetting, electrochromic mirror, air conditioning F 49 7.5 +15 airbag control unit F 50 7.5 OF THE CAR CORRECT USE +15 Connect, Blue-tooth control unit, after market radio presetting, pneumatic pressure control unit, cruise control, rain / twilight sensor control unit, parking sensor control unit, AQS sensor F 51 7.5 WARNING MESSAGES +15 excluded during ignition for electronic column switch module (rear window LIGHTS AND wiper), relay coil on boot compartment control unit F 52 15 +30 instrument panel F 53 10 IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE S TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX

187 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 188

Fuse box in engine compartment

AND USERS FUSE AMPERE

DASHBOARD Left fog light / cornering light F 9 7.5 Buzzers F 10 15 Engine control system power supply F 11 15 SAFETY DEVICES RH high beam F 14 7.5 LH high beam F 15 7.5 +15 engine control unit F 16 7.5 OF THE CAR CORRECT USE Engine control system power supply F 17 10 +30 engine control unit F 18 7.5 Conditioner compressor F 19 7.5 WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND Headlamp washer pump F 20 20 Fuel pump F 21 15

IN AN Engine control system power supply F 22 20 EMERGENCY +30 radio / Connect, supplementary heater control unit F 23 20 +15 automatic transmission control unit, automatic transmission switch F 24 15

CAR Right fog light / cornering light F 30 7.5 TECHNICAL INDEX

188 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 189

Fuse box in the boot

USERS FUSE AMPERE AND CONTROLS +30 Hi-Fi audio amplifier F 54 25 DASHBOARD Free F 55 – +30 front driver seat regulation control unit F 56 25 SAFETY DEVICES +15 excluded during ignition for front driver seat heating F 57 7.5 Free F 58 – Free F 59 – OF THE CAR +30 front passenger seat regulation control unit F 60 25 CORRECT USE Free F 61 – Free F 62 – WARNING MESSAGES Free F 63 – LIGHTS AND Free F 64 –

Free F 65 – IN AN Free F 66 – EMERGENCY +15 excluded during ignition for front driver seat heating F 67 7.5

Free F 68 – CAR

Free F 69 – MAINTENANCE Free F 77 – S Free F 78 – TECHNICAL Free F 79 – SPECIFICATION Free F 80 – INDEX

189 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 190

IF THE BATTERY IS FLAT WARNING JACKING THE CAR The liquid in the battery is AND WARNING The battery charging proce- poisonous and corrosive. Do If the car is to be lifted, go to a Fiat Deal-

DASHBOARD dure is described only for information pur- not let it touch the skin or eyes. ership which is equipped with the arm poses. This operation should be carried Recharging the battery should be hoist or workshop lift. out by Fiat Dealership. done in a well ventilated area away Jack up the car only by positioning the jack Charging should be slow at a low amp rat- from naked flames or possible sources arms or the shop jack in the points shown SAFETY DEVICES ing for 24 hours. Charging for a longer of sparks: explosion and fire risk. in fig. 52. time may damage the battery. Charge the battery as follows: ❒ disconnect battery negative terminal; OF THE CAR CORRECT USE ❒ connect the charger cables to the battery terminals, observing the poles; ❒ turn on the charger; WARNING WARNING MESSAGES Do not attempt to charge a LIGHTS AND ❒ when you have finished, turn the frozen battery: it must first- charger off before disconnecting the ly be thawed, otherwise it may burst. battery; If freezing has occurred, the battery

IN AN ❒ reconnect battery negative terminal. should be checked by skilled person-

EMERGENCY nel to make sure that the internal el- IMPORTANT If the car is fitted with alarm ements are not damaged and that the system, turn it off with the remote con- body is not cracked, with the risk of trol (see “Alarm” in section “Dashboard leaking poisonous and corrosive acid. CAR and controls”). TECHNICAL INDEX

190 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 191

TOWING THE CAR

The tow ring provided with the car is AND CONTROLS

housed in the tool box under the boot DASHBOARD mat. A TOW RING HOOKING fig. 53-54 SAFETY Proceed as follows: DEVICES ❒ fig. 52 F0L0525m release the cap A; fig. 53 F0L0362m ❒ take the tow hook B from its support;

❒ OF THE CAR

tighten the ring on the rear or front CORRECT USE threaded pin. Refer to the specific chapter for towing cars fitted with electronic automatic trans- WARNING MESSAGES mission. A LIGHTS AND IN AN

F0L0363m fig. 54 EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE S TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION INDEX

191 157-192 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:14 Pagina 192

WARNING WARNING WARNING When towing, remember Do not start the engine Before starting to tow, dis- AND that without the help of the when towing the car. engage the steering lock

DASHBOARD brake booster and power steering, a (see paragraph “Ignition device” in greater effort is required on the ped- section “Dashboard and controls”). al and steering wheel. Do not use When towing, remember that with- flexible cables for towing and avoid out the help of the brake booster SAFETY DEVICES jerks. During towing operations and power steering, a greater effort make sure that fastening the joint to WARNING is required on the pedal and steering the car does not damage the com- Before fitting the hook, wheel. Do not use flexible cables for ponents in contact with it. When clean accurately its thread- towing and avoid jerks. During tow- towing the car, you must comply ed seat. Before starting to tow, make ing operations make sure that fas-

OF THE CAR with the specific traffic regulations tening the joint to the car does not CORRECT USE sure to have tighten the hook. regarding the tow ring and how to damage the components in contact tow on the road. with it. When towing the car, you must comply with the specific traffic regulations regarding the tow ring WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND and how to tow on the road. IN AN EMERGENCY CAR TECHNICAL INDEX

192 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 193

CCAARR MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE

SCHEDULED SERVICING ...... 194 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS SERVICE SCHEDULE ...... 195 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ...... 197 SAFETY HEAVY-DUTY ...... 197 DEVICES CHECKING FLUID LEVELS...... 198 AIR FILTER/POLLEN FILTER ...... 207 OF THE CAR

DIESEL FUEL FILTER ...... 207 CORRECT USE BATTERY ...... 208 WHEELS AND TYRES...... 210 WARNING MESSAGES RUBBER HOSES ...... 211 LIGHTS AND WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOW WIPERS...... 212 BODYWORK ...... 213 IN AN

INTERIORS ...... 215 EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

193 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 194

SCHEDULED SERVICING IMPORTANT The Programmed Mainte- IMPORTANT You are advised to contact nance coupons are specified by the Man- Fiat Dealership in the event of any minor Correct maintenance is essential for en- ufacturer- The failure to have them car- operating faults, without waiting for the

DASHBOARD suring long car life under the best condi- ried out may invalidate the warranty. next service coupon. AND CONTROLS tions. Scheduled Servicing is performed by all Fi- If your car is used frequently for towing, This is why Fiat has programmed a series at Dealership, at pre-established times. the interval between one service coupon of checks and maintenance operations and the other must be reduced. SAFETY

DEVICES If during each operation, in addition to the every 30.000 km. ones programmed, the need arises for fur- It is however important to remember that ther replacements or repairs, these may scheduled servicing does not completely be carried out only with the explicit agree- cover all the car’s requirements: also in ment of the Customer. OF THE CAR

CORRECT USE the initial period before 30.000 km service coupon and later, between one coupon and another, ordinary care is still required such as for example routine check and topping up the level of fluids, tyre pressure WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND check, etc... IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

194 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 195

SERVICE SCHEDULE

Thousands of km 30 60 90 120 150 180 DASHBOARD Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure if required ●●●●●● AND CONTROLS Check light system operation(headlights, direction indicators, hazard lights, boot lights, passenger compartment lights, SAFETY glovebox lights, warning lights, etc.) ●●●●●● DEVICES Check windscreen wiper/washer operation, adjust nozzles if required ●●●●●● Check windscreen/rear window blade position/wear ●●●●●● OF THE CAR CORRECT USE Check front disk brake pad conditions and wear and wear indicator operation ●●●●●● Check rear disk brake pad conditions and wear ●●● WARNING MESSAGES Sight inspect the conditions of: body external parts, LIGHTS AND underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel - brakes), rubber parts (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.) ●●●●●● IN AN

Check cleanness of locks, bonnet and boot and lever cleanness EMERGENCY and lubrication ●●●●●● Check and top up, if required, fluid levels (brakes/hydraulic clutch, power steering, windscreen/rear window washer, battery, engine coolant, etc.) ●●●●●● CAR Check power steering system (2.2 petrol versions) ●●●●●● MAINTENANCE Check and adjust handbrake lever stroke, if required ●●● Sight inspect accessory drive belt conditions (Multijet vers.) ●● TECHNICAL Sight inspect accessory drive belt conditions (1.8 petrol versions) ●● SPECIFICATIONS Sight inspect timing belt (1.8 petrol versions) ●●

Check and adjust tappet clearance (1.9 Multijet 8V vers.) ●●●INDEX Check and adjust tappet clearance (1.8 petrol versions) ● 195 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 196

Thousands of km 30 60 90 120 150 180

Check exhaust emissions (petrol versions) ●●●●●●

DASHBOARD ●●●●●●

AND CONTROLS Check exhaust emissions/smoke (Multijet versions) Check antievaporation system (petrol versions) ●● Check engine control system operation (through diagnostic socket) ●●●●●● SAFETY DEVICES Check and top up, if required, automatic transmission oil level ●●●●●● Replace accessory drive belt/s (Multijet versions / petrol exclude 1.8) ● Replace accessory drive belt/s (1.8 petrol versions) ●

OF THE CAR O CORRECT USE Replace timing belt (Multijet versions) ● Replace timing belt (1.8 petrol versions)O ● Change spark plugs (petrol versions exclude 1.8) ● WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND Change spark plugs (1.8 petrol versions) ●●● Replace diesel fuel filter (Multijet versions) ●●● Change air cleaner cartridge (petrol versions) ●●● IN AN

EMERGENCY Change air cleaner cartridge (Multijet versions) ●●●●●● Change engine oil and oil filter (petrol versions) ●●●●●●

CAR Change engine oil and oil filter (Multijet versions - DPF)* (●)(●)(●)(●)(●)(●)

MAINTENANCE Change engine oil and oil filter (Multijet versions without DPF) ●●●●●● Change brake fluid (or every 2 years) ●●● Change pollen filter (or every year) ●●●●●● TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS O regardless of the km covered, the timing belt shall be replaced every 4 years for particularly demanding use (cold climates, driving in the city, idling for a long time) or in any case every 5 years. (*) The engine oil and oil filter should be changed depending on their actual condition, which is indicated by a warning light/message on the

INDEX control panel or at least every 2 years. If the car is used mainly on urban routes or if the yearly kilometres travelled are less than 10,000 km, the engine oil and filter must be changed every 12 months 196 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 197

ROUTINE HEAVY-DUTY ❒ check cleanness of locks, bonnet and MAINTENANCE boot and lever cleanness and lubrica- Should prevailing use of the car be under tion;

one of the following specially heavy con- DASHBOARD ❒ sight inspect the conditions of: engine, AND CONTROLS Every 1,000 km or before long journeys, ditions: check and top up if required: gearbox, transmission, pipes and hoses ❒ trailer or caravan towing; (exhaust - fuel - brakes), rubber parts ❒ engine coolant fluid level; (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.); SAFETY ❒ dusty roads; DEVICES ❒ brake fluid level; ❒ check battery charge and fluid level ❒ short distances (less than 7-8 km) re- ❒ windscreen washer fluid level; (electrolyte) (only to be carried out by peated and with external tempera- skilled personnel or at Fiat Dealership ❒ tyre pressure and conditions; tures below zero; – see also paragraph “Battery” in this section); ❒ ❒ OF THE CAR light system operation (headlights, di- frequently idling engines or long dis- CORRECT USE rection indicators, hazard lights, etc.); tance low speed driving (e.g. door-to- ❒ visual check on various drive belt con- ❒ door deliveries) or in case of a long ditions; windscreen wiper/washer operation term inactivity; and windscreen/rear window blade ❒ check and replace pollen filter, if re- WARNING MESSAGES position/wear; ❒ driving in the city; quired; LIGHTS AND Every 3,000 km check and top up if re- carry out the following checks more fre- ❒ check and replace air cleaner, if required: engine oil level. quently than required in the Service quired.

Schedule: IN AN You are recommended to use FL Selenia, products, designed and pro- ❒ check front disk brake pad conditions EMERGENCY duced specifically for Fiat cars (see table and wear; “Capacities” in section “Technical speci-

fications”). CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

197 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 198

CHECKING FLUID LEVELS DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS 1. Engine oil 2. Battery Brake fluid SAFETY 3. DEVICES 4. Windscreen/rear window washer fluid 5. Engine coolant OF THE CAR

CORRECT USE 6. Power steering fluid

fig. 1 - 1.8 versions F0L0522m WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND When topping up take care not to confuse the various types of fluids: they are all in- compatible with one another IN AN and could seriously damage the car. EMERGENCY

CAR WARNING MAINTENANCE Never smoke while working in the engine compartment; gas and inflammable vapours may be present, with the risk of fire. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

198 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 199

1. Engine oil 2. Battery

3. Brake fluid DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS 4. Windscreen/rear window washer fluid SAFETY 5. Engine coolant DEVICES

IMPORTANT Topping up or change of the power steering fluid of 2.2 petrol versions shall be carried out at a Fiat Deal-

ership. OF THE CAR CORRECT USE

fig. 2 - 2.2 versions F0L0158m WARNING When topping up take care MESSAGES not to confuse the various LIGHTS AND types of fluids: they are all in- compatible with one another

and could seriously damage the car. IN AN EMERGENCY CAR WARNING Never smoke while working MAINTENANCE in the engine compartment; gas and inflammable vapours may be present, with the risk of fire. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

199 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 200

1. Engine oil 2. Battery

DASHBOARD 3. Brake fluid AND CONTROLS 4. Windscreen/rear window washer fluid SAFETY DEVICES 5. Engine coolant 6. Power steering fluid OF THE CAR CORRECT USE When topping up take care not to confuse the various types of fluids: they are all in- fig. 3 - 1.9 Multijet 8V versions F0L0208m compatible with one another WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND and could seriously damage the car. IN AN

EMERGENCY WARNING Never smoke while working in the engine compartment; CAR gas and inflammable vapours may be

MAINTENANCE present, with the risk of fire. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

200 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 201

1. Engine oil 2. Battery

3. Brake fluid DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS 4. Windscreen/rear window washer fluid SAFETY 5. Engine coolant DEVICES 6. Power steering fluid OF THE CAR When topping up take care CORRECT USE not to confuse the various types of fluids: they are all in- F0L0521m fig. 4 - 1.9 Multijet 16V versions compatible with one another WARNING MESSAGES and could seriously damage the car. LIGHTS AND IN AN

WARNING EMERGENCY Never smoke while working in the engine compartment;

gas and inflammable vapours may be CAR present, with the risk of fire. MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

201 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 202

1. Engine oil 2. Battery

DASHBOARD 3. Brake fluid AND CONTROLS 4. Windscreen/rear window washer fluid SAFETY DEVICES 5. Engine coolant 6. Power steering fluid OF THE CAR CORRECT USE When topping up take care not to confuse the various types of fluids: they are all in- F0L0317m fig. 5 - 2.4 Multijet 20V versions compatible with one another WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND and could seriously damage the car. IN AN

EMERGENCY WARNING Never smoke while working in the engine compartment;

CAR gas and inflammable vapours may be

MAINTENANCE present, with the risk of fire. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

202 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 203 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 6 - 1.8 versions F0L0523m fig. 7 - 2.2 versions F0L0198m fig. 9 - 1.9 Multijet 16V versions F0L0210m

ENGINE OIL OF THE CAR CORRECT USE

Checking engine oil Check the oil level a few minutes (about WARNING MESSAGES

5) after the engine has stopped, with the LIGHTS AND car parked on level ground. Remove the dipstick A and clean it, put

it back in completely, remove it and check IN AN

that the level is within the MIN and MAX F0L0211m F0L0316m EMERGENCY marks on the dipstick. The gap between fig. 8 - 1.9 Multijet 8V versions fig. 10 - 2.4 Multijet 20V versions the MIN and MAX marks corresponds to about one litre of oil. IMPORTANT If a routine check reveals

WARNING CAR that the oil level is above the MAX mark, When the engine is hot, take Topping up engine oil contact Fiat Dealership to have the cor- MAINTENANCE rect level restored. care when working inside the If the oil level is near or even below the engine compartment to avoid burns. MIN mark, add oil through the filler neck IMPORTANT After adding or changing Remember that when the engine is B, until reaching the MAX mark. the oil, let the engine turn over for a few hot, fan may cut in: danger of injury. TECHNICAL

seconds and wait a few minutes after turn- Scarves, ties and other loose cloth- SPECIFICATIONS Oil level shall never exceed the MA mark. ing it off before you check the level. ing might be pulled by moving parts. INDEX

203 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 204

Used engine oil and filter con- The cooling system uses tain harmful substances for PARAFLU UP antifreeze. Do the environment. Contact Fi- not add fluid having different

DASHBOARD specifications from that al- AND CONTROLS at Dealership to have the oil and filter changed. ready existing. PARAFLU UP cannot be mixed with other types of fluids. Should other fluids be added, do not start the SAFETY DEVICES engine and contact Fiat Dealership as soon as possible. Engine oil consumption fig. 11 F0L0194m Max engine oil consumption is usually 400

OF THE CAR grams every 1000 km. ENGINE COOLANT FLUID fig. 11 CORRECT USE When the car is new, the engine needs The coolant level shall be checked with WARNING to run in, therefore the engine oil con- cold engine and shall not be lower than Do not remove the reservoir sumption can only be considered stabilised the MIN on the reservoir. cap when the engine is hot: WARNING MESSAGES after the first 5000 - 6000 km. LIGHTS AND If the level is low, pour slowly a mixture you risk scalding yourself. IMPORTANT The oil consumption de- of 50% distilled water and 50% pends on driving style and the conditions PARAFLU UP by FL Selenia through under which the car is used. the filler neck A. IN AN

EMERGENCY IMPORTANT Do not add oil with speci- A 50-50 mixture of PARAFLU UP and fications other than that already in the en- distilled water gives freeze protection to gine. –35°C.

CAR For particularly hard climate conditions, we WARNING

MAINTENANCE recommend use of a 60% PARAFLU UP The cooling system is pres- and 40% demineralized water mixture. surised. If necessary, replace the cap only with another genuine one, otherwise system efficiency could be compromised. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

204 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 205 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 12 F0L0192m fig. 13 F0L0193m fig. 14 - Multijet - F0L0212m 1.8 petrol versions

WINDSCREEN/REAR POWER STEERING FLUID fig. 14 OF THE CAR WARNING CORRECT USE WINDOW/HEADLIGHT Do not travel with the wind- WASHER FLUID screen washer reservoir 1.8 petrol and Multijet versions To top up, remove the cap A-fig. 12 and empty. The windscreen washer is fun- Check that the fluid level in the reservoir WARNING MESSAGES

then pour a mixture of water and damental for improving visibility. is at maximum level. LIGHTS AND TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35, in the following concentrations: This operation shall be carried out with the car on level surface, engine not run- ❒ 30% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL

ning and cold. IN AN

SC 35 and 70% water in summer; EMERGENCY WARNING Check that the fluid level is at the MAX ❒ 50% TUTELA PROFESSIONAL Certain commercial addi- mark on the dipstick integral with reser- SC 35 and 50% water in winter. tives for windscreen washers voir cap A-fig. 14. In case of temperatures below –20°C, use are inflammable. The engine com- If the fluid level in the reservoir is below CAR

undiluted TUTELA PROFESSIONAL partment contains hot components the specified level, contact Fiat Dealership. MAINTENANCE SC 35. which may set it on fire. Check level through the reservoir.

Proper dipstick shows the fluid level fig. TECHNICAL 13 in the windscreen washer reservoir. SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

205 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 206

2.2 versions At plug opening, pay maximum attention in order to prevent any impurities from Contact Fiat Dealership for topping up or entering the tank. changing the power steering fluid. DASHBOARD

AND CONTROLS For topping up, always use a funnel with integrated filter with mesh equal to or lower than 0.12 mm. SAFETY

DEVICES IMPORTANT Brake fluid absorbs mois- WARNING ture, for this reason, if the vehicle is main- Do not allow the power ly used in areas with a high degree of at- steering fluid to touch the fig. 15 F0L0196m mospheric humidity, the fluid should be hot parts of the engine: it is inflam- replaced at more frequent intervals than mable. specified in the “Service schedule”. OF THE CAR BRAKE FLUID fig. 15 CORRECT USE Unscrew cap A: check that the fluid level in the reservoir is at maximum. Fluid level in the reservoir shall not exceed WARNING MESSAGES Make sure that the highly cor- LIGHTS AND the MAX mark. rosive brake fluid does not drip If fluid has to be added, it is suggested to onto the paintwork; if it does, use the brake fluid in table "Fluids and lu- wash it off immediately with

IN AN bricants" (see chapter "Technical charac- water.

EMERGENCY teristics").

NOTE Clean accurately the tank cap A CAR and the surrounding surface. MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

206 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 207

WARNING AIR FILTER/POLLEN DIESEL FUEL FILTER Brake fluid is poisonous and FILTER highly corrosive. In the event

DRAINING THE CONDENSE DASHBOARD of accidental contact, wash the parts Air cleaner or pollen filter replacement (Multijet versions) AND CONTROLS involved immediately with neutral shall be carried out at a Fiat Dealership. soap and water, then rinse thoroughly. Call the doctor immediately SAFETY if the fluid is swallowed. The presence of water in the DEVICES fuel circuit can severely damage the injection system and make the engine misfire. If the warning light c turns on, contact a Fi-

at Dealership as soon as possible to OF THE CAR have the bleeding operation carried CORRECT USE WARNING out. Should the warning light turn on Symbol0 π on the container after refuelling, water has probably been poured into the tank: turn the en-

indicates synthetic brake flu- WARNING MESSAGES id, distinguishing it from the mineral gine off immediately and contact a Fi- LIGHTS AND kind. Using mineral fluids irreversibly at Dealership. damages the special braking system

rubber seals. IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

207 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 208

BATTERY WARNING Running the battery with The battery is of the “Limited mainte- low fluid level can damage DASHBOARD nance” type: under normal conditions of AND CONTROLS the battery beyond repair and could use the electrolyte does not need topping also cause its explosion. up with distilled water. SAFETY DEVICES CHECKING THE CHARGE fig. 16 The battery charge may be checked sat- isfactorily through the inspection slot us- fig. 16 F0L0191m ing the indicator A (where provided) and acting according to the colour the indica- Bright white colour Top up electrolyte Contact Fiat Dealership OF THE CAR CORRECT USE tor shows. Dark colour without Low charge level Charge the battery If the battery does not fit a charge and green area in the centre (advisable to contact electrolyte level gauge, the corresponding Fiat Dealership)

WARNING operations must be performed by spe- MESSAGES LIGHTS AND cialised personnel only. Dark colour with Electrolyte level and charge No action green area in the centre sufficient Refer to the table below or to the label B on the battery. IN AN

EMERGENCY IMPORTANT Check the battery charge CHANGING THE BATTERY WARNING once a year, preferably before the begin- If required, replace the battery with a gen- The liquid in the battery is ning to winter, to prevent freezing of the uine spare part having the same specifi- poisonous and corrosive. electrolyte. Perform this inspection more CAR cations. Avoid contact with eyes and skin. Do frequently if the car is mainly used for MAINTENANCE not bring naked flames or possible short distances or if electrical devices run- If a battery with different specifications is sources of sparks near to the battery: ning with the key off are installed, partic- fitted, the service intervals given in the risk of fire and explosion. ularly after-market. “Service schedule” in this section will no longer be valid. TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS Refer to the instructions provided by the battery manufacturer. INDEX

208 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 209

Incorrect fitting of electrical WARNING IMPORTANT A battery which is kept at and electronic accessories can a charge of less than 50% (optical indica- When working on the bat- tor with dark colour without green area seriously damage the car. If af- tery or near it, always wear

in the middle) for any length of time will DASHBOARD

ter buying the car, you want the proper goggles. AND CONTROLS to install electric accessories which re- be damaged by sulphation leading to a require permanent electric supply duction in cranking power. (alarm, free-hand phone kit, etc.) con- Moreover, this might lead to a higher risk SAFETY tact Fiat Dealership whose qualified of the battery electrolyte freezing (this DEVICES personnel, in addition to suggesting the USEFUL ADVICE FOR LENGTHENING THE LIFE OF may even occur at -10°C). If the car is in- most suitable devices, will evaluate the active for a long period of time, refer to overall electric absorption, checking YOUR BATTERY “Car inactivity”, in section “Correct use whether the car electric system is ca- To avoid draining your battery and length- of the car”.

pable of withstanding the load re- OF THE CAR en its life, observe the following indica- If after buying the car, you want to install CORRECT USE quired, or whether it should be inte- tions: grated with a more powerful battery. electric accessories which require per- ❒ when you park the car, ensure the manent electric supply (alarm, etc.) con- doors, tailgate and bonnet are closed tact Fiat Dealership whose qualified per- WARNING MESSAGES properly; sonnel, in addition to suggesting the most LIGHTS AND ❒ suitable devices, will evaluate the overall Batteries contain substances the ceiling lights must be off. The car electric absorption, checking whether the that are very harmful for the is however provided with an auto- car’s electric system is capable of with- environment. You are advised matic system for switching off internal standing the load required, or whether it IN AN to have the battery changed lights; should be integrated with a more power- EMERGENCY at a Fiat Dealership, which is properly ❒ do not keep accessories (e.g.: sound ful battery. equipped for disposing of used batter- system, hazard lights, etc.) switched on

ies respecting nature and the law. for a long time when the engine is not CAR

running; MAINTENANCE ❒ before performing any operation on the electrical system, disconnect the WARNING battery negative cable; TECHNICAL

If the car is left inactive for ❒ battery terminals shall always be per- SPECIFICATIONS long periods at cold, remove fectly tightened. the battery and store it in a warm place to prevent freezing. INDEX

209 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 210

In fact, since these devices continue ab- WHEELS AND TYRES sorbing energy even when the ignition key is off, they gradually run down the battery. Check the pressure of each tyre, includ-

DASHBOARD ing the spare, every two weeks and before AND CONTROLS The total intake of these systems (facto- ry and after-market) must be less than 0,6 long journeys. The pressure should be mA x Ah (of the battery) as shown in the checked with the tyre rested and cold. following table: For the correct tyre inflation pressure, see SAFETY DEVICES “Wheels” in “Technical specifications” Battery Maximum section. admitted fig. 17 F0L0159m stand-by intake Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyre wear:

OF THE CAR 70 Ah 42 mA IMPORTANT NOTES CORRECT USE A normal pressure: tread evenly worn. 90 Ah (*) 54 mA ❒ As far as possible, avoid sharp brak- B low pressure: tread particularly worn ing and screech starts, etc. Be careful (*) Versions fitted with alarm. at the edges. not to hit the kerb, potholes or oth- WARNING MESSAGES er obstacles hard. Driving for long LIGHTS AND C high pressure: tread particularly worn in the centre. stretches over bumpy roads can damage the tyres; Tyres must be replaced when the tread ❒ Periodically check that the tyres have

IN AN wears down to 1.6 mm. In any case, com- no cuts in the side wall, abnormal EMERGENCY ply with the laws in the country where the car is being driven. swelling or irregular tyre wear. If any of these occur, have the car seen to at a Fiat Dealership; CAR ❒ Avoid overloading the car when trav- MAINTENANCE elling: this may cause serious damage to the wheels and tyres; TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

210 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 211

❒ If a tyre is punctured, stop immediate- WARNING RUBBER HOSES ly and change it to avoid damage to the tyre, the rim, suspensions and steering Remember that road holding depends also on the correct As far as the brake system and fuel rubber system; hoses are concerned, carefully follow the DASHBOARD tyre inflating pressure. AND CONTROLS ❒ Tyres age even if they are not used “Service schedule” in this section. much. Cracks in the tread rubber are Indeed ozone, high temperatures and pro- a sign of ageing. In any case, if the tyres longed lack of fluid in the system may SAFETY have been on the car for over 6 years, cause hardening and cracking of the hoses, DEVICES they should be checked by specialised with possible leaks. Careful control is personnel, to see if they can still be WARNING therefore necessary. used. Also remember to check the space-saver spare wheel; If the pressure is too low the

tyre overheats and this can OF THE CAR ❒ In the case of replacement, always fit cause it serious damage. CORRECT USE new tyres, avoiding those of dubious origin; ❒ WARNING

If a tyre is changed, also change the in- MESSAGES flation valve; LIGHTS AND ❒ To allow even wear between the front WARNING and rear tyres, it is advisable to change Do not cross switch the them over every 10-15 thousand kilo- tyres, moving them from the IN AN metres, keeping them on the same right of the car to the left and vice EMERGENCY side of the car so as to not reverse the versa. direction of rotation. CAR MAINTENANCE

WARNING Never submit alloy rims to

repainting treatments re- TECHNICAL quiring to use temperatures exceed- SPECIFICATIONS ing 150°C since the mechanical prop- erties of the wheels could be im-

paired. INDEX

211 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 212

WINDSCREEN/ REAR WINDOW

DASHBOARD WIPERS AND CONTROLS

BLADES SAFETY DEVICES Periodically clean the rubber part using special products; TUTELA PROFES- SIONAL SC 35 is recommended. fig. 18 F0L0203m fig. 19 F0L0150m If the rubber blades are bent or worn they should be replaced. In any case they should OF THE CAR Changing the windscreen wiper Changing the rear window blade CORRECT USE be changed once a year. blades fig. 18 fig. 19 A few simple notions can reduce the pos- Proceed as follows: Proceed as follows: sibility of damage to the blades: ❒ raise the windscreen wiper arm A and ❒ raise the cover A and remove the arm WARNING MESSAGES

LIGHTS AND ❒ if the temperature fall below zero, position the blade so that it forms an from the car, slackening the nut B that make sure that ice has not frozen the angle of 90° with the arm; fastens it to the pivot pin; rubber against glass. If necessary, thaw using an antifreeze product; ❒ remove the snap fitted blade A from ❒ fit the new arm, positioning it cor- IN AN arm B; rectly, and fully tighten the nut;

EMERGENCY ❒ remove any snow from the glass: in addition to protecting the blades, this ❒ fit the new blade and check it is prop- ❒ lower the cover. prevents effort on the motor and erly locked into place. overheating; CAR ❒ do not operate the windscreen and MAINTENANCE rear window wipers on dry glass.

WARNING TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS Driving with worn wiper blades is a serious hazard, because visibility is reduced in bad weather. INDEX

212 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 213

BODYWORK

PROTECTION FROM DASHBOARD ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS AND CONTROLS The main causes of corrosion are the following: SAFETY DEVICES ❒ atmospheric pollution; fig. 20 F0L0152m fig. 21 F0L0151m ❒ salty air and humidity (coastal areas, or hot humid climates); ❒ SPRAY NOZZLES Rear window wiper fig. 21 seasonal environment conditions. OF THE CAR CORRECT USE Rear window washer jets can be adjust- Not to be underestimated is also the abra- Windscreen wiper fig. 20 ed in the same way. sive action of wind-borne atmospheric dust and sand and mud and gravel raised If the jet of fluid is inadequate, firstly check The nozzle holder is on the rear window. WARNING by other cars. MESSAGES that there is fluid in the reservoir: see LIGHTS AND “Checking fluid levels” in this section). HEADLIGHT WASHERS On your Fiat Croma, Fiat implemented Then check that the nozzle holes are not the best manufacturing technologies to ef- Regularly check that the spray jets are in- fectively protect the bodywork against

clogged, if necessary use a needle. IN AN tact and clean. corrosion. Fluid jets shall be directed at about 1/3 EMERGENCY height from the window upper edge. The headlight washers are automatically These include: switched on when the windscreen washer is operated and the headlights are on. ❒ Painting products and systems which give the car particular resistance to CAR

corrosion and abrasion; MAINTENANCE ❒ Use of galvanised (or pretreated) steel sheets, with high resistance to corrosion; TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

213 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 214

❒ Spraying the underbody, engine com- ADVICE FOR PRESERVING If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car partment, wheelhouse internal parts THE BODYWORK wash, follow these recommendations: and other parts with highly protective – remove the antenna from the roof to

DASHBOARD wax products;

AND CONTROLS Paint avoid damages; ❒ Spraying of plastic parts, with a pro- Paintwork does not only serve an aesteth- tective function, in the more exposed – water with a cleansing solution must be ic purpose, but also protects the under- used for washing; points: underdoor, inner fender parts, lying sheet metal. SAFETY DEVICES edges, etc.; – rinse accurately to avoid cleansing so- In the case of deep scrapes or scores, you ❒ Use of “open” boxed sections to pre- lution residues which may remain on the are advised to have the necessary touch- body or hidden parts. vent condensation and pockets of ing up carried out immediately to avoid moisture from triggering rust inside. the formation of rust. Use only original OF THE CAR

CORRECT USE paint products for touching up (see “Body- BODY AND UNDERBODY work paint identification plate” in section WARRANTY “Technical specification”). Normal paint Some automatic systems pro- maintenance consists in washing at inter- vided with old generation Your car is covered by warranty against vals depending on the conditions and en- and/or not correctly maintai- WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND perforation due to rust of any original el- vironment of use. For example, in highly ned brushes may damage the ement of the structure or body. For the polluted areas, or if the roads are sprayed varnish, easing the creation of micro- general terms of this warranty, refer to with salt, it is wise to wash the car more scratches, especially on dark colours. the Fiat Warranty booklet. frequently. To remove those scratches, slightly po- IN AN lish with a specific product. EMERGENCY For a correct wash of the vehicle proceed as follows: ❒ soak the body with a low pressure wa- CAR ter jet; When drying, take particular care with the

MAINTENANCE ❒ less visible parts like door surrounds, bon- pass on the body a sponge with a li- net and around the headlights where wa- ght cleansing solution, frequently rin- ter may stagnate. The car should not be sing the sponge; taken to a closed area immediately, but left ❒ TECHNICAL rinse accurately with water and dry in the open so that residual water can eva- SPECIFICATIONS with air jet or suede. porate. Do not wash the car after it has been left in the sun or with the bonnet hot: this may alter the shine of the paintwork. INDEX

214 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 215

Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in Windows INTERIORS the same way as the rest of the car. Use specific window cleaner products. Where possible, do not park under trees; Use also clean cloths to avoid scratching Periodically check that water is not

trapped under the mats (due to water DASHBOARD the resinous substance many species re- the glass or damaging the transparency. AND CONTROLS lease give the paint a dull appearance and dripping off shoes, umbrellas, etc.) which increase the possibility of triggering rust IMPORTANT The inside of the could cause oxidisation of the sheet met- processes. rearscreen should be wiped gently with a al. SAFETY

cloth in the direction of the filaments to DEVICES IMPORTANT Bird droppings must be avoid damaging the heating device. CLEANING SEATS AND FABRIC washed off immediately and thoroughly as AND VELVET PARTS the acid they contain is particularly ag- Engine compartment gressive. Use a soft brush or vacuum cleaner to re- At the end of the winter the engine com- move dust. Velvet is cleaned better if the OF THE CAR partment should be carefully washed, brush is moistened. CORRECT USE without directing the jet against electronic control units. Contact a specialised Rub the seats with a sponge moistened workshop to have this done. with a solution of water and neutral de- WARNING tergent. MESSAGES IMPORTANT The car should be washed LIGHTS AND Detergents cause water pollu- with the engine cold and the ignition key CLEANING LEATHER SEATS tion. Therefore the car should at OFF. After washing make sure that the various protections (e.g. rubber caps and Remove dried on dirt with lightly moist- be washed in areas equipped IN AN various covers) have not been damaged or for collecting and purifying the ened chamois leather or cloth without EMERGENCY liquid used in the washing process. removed. pressing too hard. Remove liquid or grease stains with a dry

absorbent cloth without rubbing. Then CAR wipe with a soft cloth or chamois leather with water and neutral soap. MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

215 193-216 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 11:23 Pagina 216

If the stain persists, use specific products, STEERING WHEEL/GEAR LEVER INTERIOR PLASTIC PARTS carefully following the instructions for use. KNOB WITH GENUINE Use appropriate products designed to IMPORTANT Never use spirit or alcohol- LEATHER COVERING preserve the appearance of components. DASHBOARD

AND CONTROLS based products. These components shall only be cleaned IMPORTANT Never use spirit or petro- with water and neutral soap. Never use leum to clean the instrument panel. spirit or alcohol-based products. SAFETY DEVICES Before using special products for cleaning interiors, read carefully label instructions and indications to make sure they WARNING are free from spirit and/or alcohol-based WARNING Never use flammable prod- substances. Do not keep aerosol cans in

OF THE CAR ucts like oil ether or rectified the car: they might explode. CORRECT USE petrol for cleaning car interiors. Elec- If when cleaning the windscreen with spe- Aerosol cans must never be exposed trostatic discharges generated by rub- cial glass products, some drops fall on the to a temperature above 50°C. The bing during cleaning operations could leather covering of the steering wheel/gear temperature inside the car exposed cause fire. lever knob remove them immediately and to the sun may go well beyond that WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND then clean with water and neutral soap. figure. IMPORTANT Take the utmost care when engaging the steering lock to prevent scratching the leather covering. IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

216 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 217

TTEECCHHNNIICCAALL SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONNSS

IDENTIFICATION DATA ...... 218 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS...... 220 ENGINE ...... 221 SAFETY FUEL FEED/IGNITION ...... 223 DEVICES TRANSMISSION ...... 223 BRAKES ...... 224 OF THE CAR

SUSPENSIONS...... 224 CORRECT USE STEERING...... 224 WHEELS ...... 225 WARNING MESSAGES DIMENSIONS...... 230 LIGHTS AND PERFORMANCE ...... 231 WEIGHTS ...... 232 IN AN

CAPACITIES...... 234 EMERGENCY FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS...... 236

FUEL CONSUMPTION ...... 238 CAR

CO2 EMISSIONS ...... 240 MAINTENANCE RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: MINISTERIAL CERTIFICATIONS ...... 241 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

217 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 218

IDENTIFICATION DATA MODEL PLATE fig. 1 The plate is to be found on the front cross- You are advised to note the identification member of the engine compartment and

DASHBOARD codes. The identification data stamped and AND CONTROLS bears the following identification data: given on the plates and their position are the following: B Homologation number. ❒ Model plate C Vehicle type code. SAFETY DEVICES ❒ Chassis marking D Chassis number. ❒ Bodywork paint identification plate E Maximum vehicle weight fully loaded. fig. 1 F0L0415m ❒ Engine marking. F Maximum vehicle weight fully loaded

OF THE CAR with trailer. I Engine type. CORRECT USE G Maximum vehicle weight on front axle. L Body version code. H Maximum vehicle weight on rear axle. M Spare part code. WARNING MESSAGES

LIGHTS AND N Smoke opacity index (for diesel engines). IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

218 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 219

ENGINE MARKING Engine marking is stamped on the cylinder block and includes the model and the DASHBOARD

chassis number. AND CONTROLS SAFETY DEVICES

fig. 2 F0L0204m fig. 3 F0L0161m

CHASSIS MARKING fig. 2 BODYWORK PAINT OF THE CAR CORRECT USE It is printed on the passenger compart- IDENTIFICATION PLATE fig. 3 ment floor, near the right-hand front seat. The plate is applied inside the bonnet and It can be reached by lifting the special flap it bears the following data: WARNING MESSAGES in the carpeting and includes the following A Paint manufacturer. LIGHTS AND data: B Colour name. ❒ car model;

C Fiat colour code. IN AN ❒

chassis number. EMERGENCY D Respray and touch up code. CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

219 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 220

ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS

DASHBOARD Engine code Body version AND CONTROLS 1.8 939A4000 194AXG1A08C 2.2 194A1000 194AXA1A00C SAFETY DEVICES 2.2 a.t. 194A1000 194AXA1201C

1.9 Multijet 8V (with DPF) 939A1000 194AXB1B02C

OF THE CAR 1.9 Multijet 8V (without DPF) 939A1000 194AXB1B02D CORRECT USE 1.9 Multijet 8V (with DPF) (*) 939A1000 194BXB1BCX

1.9 Multijet 8V (without DPF) (*) 939A1000 194BXB1BDX WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND 1.9 Multijet 8V 115 HP (*) 939A7000 194AXE1B06B

1.9 Multijet 16V (with DPF) 939A2000 194AXC1B03E

IN AN 1.9 Multijet 16V (without DPF) 939A2000 194AXC1B03F EMERGENCY 1.9 Multijet 16V a.t. (with DPF) 939A2000 194AXC1204B 939A2000 194BXC1BCX CAR 1.9 Multijet 16V (with DPF) (*) 939A2000 194BXC12BX MAINTENANCE 1.9 Multijet 16V (without DPF) (*) 939A2000 194BXC1BDX

1.9 Multijet 16V 135 HP (*) 939A8000 194AXF1B07C TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS 1.9 Multijet 16V a.t. 135 HP (*) 939A8000 194AXF1209B

2.4 Multijet 20V a.t. (with DPF) 939A3000 194AXD1205B

INDEX (*) Versions for specific markets

220 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 221

ENGINE

1.8 2.2 2.2 a.t. DASHBOARD GENERAL FEATURES AND CONTROLS Engine code 939A4000 194A1000 194A1000 SAFETY Cycle Otto Otto Otto DEVICES Number and layout of cylinders 4 in line 4 in line 4 in line Piston bore and stroke mm 80.5 x 88.2 86 x 94.6 86 x 94.6 OF THE CAR CORRECT USE Total displacement cm3 1796 2198 2198 Compression ratio 10.5 : 1 10.0 : 1 10.0 : 1 WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND Maximum power (EEC) kW 103 108 108 HP 140 147 147 corresponding ratio rpm 6300 5800 5800 IN AN

Maximum torque (EEC) Nm 175 203 203 EMERGENCY kgm 17.8 20.7 20.7 corresponding ratio rpm 3800 4000 4000

Spark plugs BOSCH FQR 8 LEU2 AC DELCO HLR8STEX AC DELCO HLR8STEX CAR MAINTENANCE

Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded

petrol 95 RON petrol 95 RON petrol 95 RON TECHNICAL (Specification EN228) (Specification EN228) (Specification EN228) SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

221 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 222

1.9 Multijet 8V 1.9 Multijet 16V 1.9 Multijet 16V a.t. 2.4 Multijet 20V a.t. GENERAL FEATURES DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS Engine code 939A1000 939A2000 939A2000 939A3000 Cycle Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel SAFETY DEVICES Number and layout of cylinders 4 in line 4 in line 4 in line 5 in line Piston bore and stroke mm 82 x 90.4 82 x 90.4 82 x 90.4 82 x 90.4 Total displacement cm3 1910 1910 1910 2387 OF THE CAR CORRECT USE Compression ratio 18.0 : 1 17.5 : 1 17.5 : 1 17.0 : 1 Maximum power (EEC) kW 88 (85*) 110 (100*) 110 (100*) 147 WARNING MESSAGES HP 120 (115*)

LIGHTS AND 150 (135*) 150 (135*) 200 corresponding ratio rpm 4000 4000 4000 4000 Maximum torque (EEC) Nm 280 320 320 400

IN AN kgm 28.6 32.6 32.6 40.8

EMERGENCY corresponding ratio rpm 2000 2000 2000 2000 Fuel Diesel fuel for Diesel fuel for Diesel fuel for Diesel fuel for motor vehicles motor vehicles motor vehicles motor vehicles CAR (Specification EN590) (Specification EN590) (Specification EN590) (Specification EN590) MAINTENANCE

(*) Versions for specific markets TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

222 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 223

FUEL FEED/IGNITION

1.8 - 2.2 Multijet DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS

Fuel feed Multipoint electronic injection Direct injection with electronically controlled Multijet “Common Rail”, SAFETY

turbosupercharger and intercooler DEVICES

WARNING OF THE CAR

Modifications or repairs to the fuel system that are not carried out properly or do not take the system’s tech- CORRECT USE nical specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire. WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND IN AN

TRANSMISSION EMERGENCY

1.8 - 2.2 2.2 a.t. 1.9 Multijet 1.9 Multijet 16V a.t. 2.4 Multijet 20V a.t. CAR MAINTENANCE Gearbox 5 forward gears automatic 5 forward 6 forward gears automatic + Reverse gears + + Reverse 6 forward gears Reverse and tip + Reverse and tip TECHNICAL Drive front front front front SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

223 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 224

BRAKES

1.8 - 2.2 - 1.9 Multijet 8V 2.4 Multijet 20V a.t.

DASHBOARD 1.9 Multijet 16V AND CONTROLS Service brakes: – front Disc, self-ventilating Disc, self-ventilating SAFETY DEVICES – rear Disc Disc, self-ventilating Parking brake Controlled by hand lever, Controlled by hand lever, it works on rear brakes it works on rear brakes OF THE CAR CORRECT USE IMPORTANT Water, ice and antifreeze salt on roads may deposit on the brake discs thus reducing braking efficiency at first braking. WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND SUSPENSIONS

1.8 - 2.2 - Multijet IN AN

EMERGENCY Front McPherson independent wheels Rear Multilink independent wheels CAR MAINTENANCE STEERING

1.8 - 2.2 - Multijet 2.4 Multijet 20V a.t. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Type Electro-hydraulic power steering Electro-hydraulic power steering Minimum steering

INDEX cycle m 11,45 11,80

224 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 225

WHEELS SPACE-SAVER SPARE WHEEL Pressed steel rim. Tubeless tyre.

RIMS AND TYRES DASHBOARD WHEEL GEOMETRY AND CONTROLS Pressed steel or alloy rims. Tubeless tyres with radial carcass. The homologated tyres In order to guarantee the correct regula- are listed in the Log book. tion and stability of the vehicle, please con- SAFETY

tact the Fiat Assistance Network. DEVICES IMPORTANT In the event of discrepan- cies between the information provided on this “Owner handbook” and the “Log fig. 4 F0L0162m book”, consider the specifications shown in the log book only.

UNDERSTANDING TYRE OF THE CAR CORRECT USE Attaining to the prescribed size, to ensure MARKING fig. 4 safety of the car in movement, it must be fitted with tyres of the same make and Example: 205/55 R 16 91 V

type on all wheels. WARNING MESSAGES 205 = Nominal width (S, distance be- LIGHTS AND IMPORTANT Do not use inner tubes tween sidewalls in mm). with Tubeless tyres. 55 = Percentage height/width ratio (H/

S). IN AN

R = Radial tyre. EMERGENCY 16 = Rim diameter in inches (Ø).

91 = Load rating (capacity). CAR

V = Maximum speed rating. MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

225 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 226

Load rating (capacity) Maximum speed rating UNDERSTANDING RIM MARKING 60 = 250 kg 84 = 500 kg Q = up to 160 km/h.

DASHBOARD 61 = 257 kg 85 = 515 kg R = up to 170 km/h. Example: 6 1/2 J x 16 H2 ET41 AND CONTROLS 62 = 265 kg 86 = 530 kg S = up to 180 km/h. 6 1/2 = rim width in inches (1). 63 = 272 kg 87 = 545 kg T = up to 190 km/h. J = rim drop center outline (side SAFETY DEVICES 64 = 280 kg 88 = 560 kg U = up to 200 km/h. projection where the tyre bead rests) (2). 65 = 290 kg 89 = 580 kg H = up to 210 km/h. 66 = 300 kg 90 = 600 kg 16 = rim nominal diameter in inches V = up to 240 km/h. (corresponds to diameter of the 67 = 307 kg 91 = 615 kg tyre to be mounted) (3 = Ø). OF THE CAR

CORRECT USE W = up to 270 km/h. 68 = 315 kg 92 = 630 kg H2 = “hump” shape and number (re- Y = up to 300 km/h. 69 = 325 kg 93 = 650 kg lief on the circumference holding the Tubeless tyre bead on 70 = 335 kg 94 = 670 kg Maximum speed rating the rim). WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND 71 = 345 kg 95 = 690 kg for snow tyres ET 41 = wheel camber angle (distance 72 = 355 kg 96 = 710 kg QM + S = up to 160 km/h. between the disc/rim supporting 73 = 365 kg 97 = 730 kg TM + S = up to 190 km/h. plane and the wheel rim centre IN AN line). EMERGENCY 74 = 375 kg 98 = 750 kg HM + S = up to 210 km/h. 75 = 387 kg 99 = 775 kg 76 = 400 kg 100 = 800 kg CAR 77 = 412 kg 101 = 825 kg MAINTENANCE 78 = 425 kg 102 = 850 kg 79 = 437 kg 103 = 875 kg 80 = 450 kg 104 = 900 kg TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS 81 = 462 kg 105 = 925 kg 82 = 475 kg 106 = 950 kg

INDEX 83 = 487 kg

226 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 227

VERSIONS RIMS (*) TYRES Space-saver spare wheel Standard tyres Snow tyres Rim Tyre

1.8 6.5J x 16” - ET 36/41 205/55 R16 91V 205/55 R16 91 H (M+S) DASHBOARD 6.5J x 16” - ET 36/41 215/55 R16 93W 215/55 R16 93 H (M+S) 4J 16 - 41 115/70 R16 92M AND CONTROLS 7J x 17” - ET 36/41 215/50 R17 91W 215/50 R17 91 H (M+S) 2.2-2.2 a.t. 6.5J x 16” - ET 36/41 205/55 R16 91V 205/55 R16 91 H (M+S) SAFETY 6.5J x 16” - ET 36/41 215/55 R16 93W 215/55 R16 93 H (M+S) DEVICES 7J x 17” - ET 36/41 215/50 R17 91W 215/50 R17 91 H (M+S) 4J 16 - 41 115/70 R16 92M 7.5J x 18” - ET 36/41 225/45 R18 95W (Ô) 225/45 R18 95 H (M+S)

1.9 Multijet 8V 6.5J x 16” - ET 36/41 205/55 R16 91V 205/55 R16 91 H (M+S) 1.9 Multijet 16V 6.5J x 16” - ET 36/41 215/55 R16 93W 215/55 R16 93 H (M+S) OF THE CAR 1.9 Multijet 16V a.t. 7J x 17” - ET 36/41 215/50 R17 91W 215/50 R17 91 H (M+S) 4J 16 - 41 115/70 R16 92M CORRECT USE 7.5J x 18” - ET 36/41 225/45 R18 95W (Ô) 225/45 R18 95 H (M+S)

2.4 Multijet 20V a.t. 7J x 17” - ET 36/41 215/50 R17 95W 215/50 R17 91 H (M+S) Ô 4J 16 - 41 115/70 R16 92M WARNING

7.5J x 18” - ET 36/41 225/45 R18 95W ( ) 225/45 R18 95 H (M+S) MESSAGES LIGHTS AND (Ô) Tyres that cannot be fitted with snow chains (*) ET 41 value referred to the rims available on the accessory line. IN AN

Note: rims with the same ET are to be used on the vehicle. EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

227 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 228

COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)

Petrol versions DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS STANDARD TYRES Space-aver Size Medium load Full load spare wheel Front Rear Front Rear SAFETY DEVICES 205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6 1.8 215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5 4.2 215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.6 OF THE CAR CORRECT USE 205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.8 2.7 215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5 2.2 4.2 215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6 WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND 225/45 R18 95W 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6 205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6

IN AN 215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5 EMERGENCY 2.2 a.t. 4.2 215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.5 225/45 R18 95W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.5 CAR

MAINTENANCE Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed inflation pressure when the tyres are warm. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres. With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres. If travelling at a speed higher than 160 km/h, inflate tyres at the values specified for fully laden conditions. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

228 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 229

Multijet versions STANDARD TYRES Space-saver Size Medium load Full load spare wheel DASHBOARD

Front Rear Front Rear AND CONTROLS 205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6 SAFETY

215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5 DEVICES 1.9 Multijet 8V 4.2 215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.5 225/45 R18 95W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.5

205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.8 2.7 OF THE CAR CORRECT USE 215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5 1.9 Multijet 16V 4.2 215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6 WARNING MESSAGES 225/45 R18 95W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.5 LIGHTS AND 205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6

1.9 Multijet 16V 215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5 IN AN

4.2 EMERGENCY a.t. 215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6 225/45 R18 95W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.5 CAR 2.4 Multijet 20V 215/50 R17 95W 2.6 2.5 2.9 2.7 4.2 MAINTENANCE a.t. 225/45 R18 95W 2.6 2.5 2.8 2.6 Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed inflation pressure when the tyres are warm. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.

With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS If travelling at a speed higher than 160 km/h, inflate tyres at the values specified for fully laden conditions. INDEX

229 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 230

DIMENSIONS

Dimensions are expressed in mm and re-

DASHBOARD fer to the car fitted with standard tyres. AND CONTROLS E The height refers to the car unladen. SAFETY

DEVICES Boot volume Unladen boot volume B C D F (V.D.A. standards) A G 500 dm3

OF THE CAR Extended boot volume CORRECT USE (with folded seat back) 893 dm3 WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND

H IN AN F0L0536m EMERGENCY fig. 5 Versions A B C D E F G H

CAR 1.8 - 2.2 - 2.2 c.a.

MAINTENANCE 1.9 Multijet 8V 4783 1046 2700 1037 1603 (*) 1524 (▼) 1775 1505 (▼) 1.9 Multijet 16V 2.4 Multijet 20V c.a. TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS (*) 1623 with roof racks; track measurements may vary according to rim size. (▼) On ground with 3 passengers INDEX

230 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 231

PERFORMANCE

Top admitted speed after initial car use in km/h. DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS PETROL VERSIONS

1.8 2.2 2.2 a.t. SAFETY DEVICES

206 210 205 OF THE CAR CORRECT USE

MULTIJET VERSIONS WARNING MESSAGES 1.9 Multijet 8V 1.9 Multijet 16V 1.9 Multijet 16V a.t. 2.4 Multijet 20V a.t. LIGHTS AND

195 210 205 (200*) 216 IN AN EMERGENCY

(*) Versions for specific markets CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

231 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 232

WEIGHTS

Weights (kg) 1.8 2.2 2.2 a.t. DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS Kerb weight (including all fluids, 1430 1510 1530 fuel tank at 90% and with no optional)

SAFETY Payload (*) including the driver: DEVICES 520 520 520 Maximum admitted loads (**) – front axle: 1100 1100 1100 – rear axle: 1030 1030 1030 – total: 1950 2030 2050 OF THE CAR CORRECT USE Towable loads – trailer with brakes: 1500 1500 1500 – trailer without brakes: 700 700 700 WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND Maximum load on roof (***): 80 80 80 Maximum load on tow hitch 70 70 70 (trailer with brakes): IN AN EMERGENCY (*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases thus reducing the specified payload.

CAR (**) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads in the boot an/or on the roof so that they comply with these limits. MAINTENANCE (***) Lineaccessori Fiat roof rack, max capacity: 50 kg. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

232 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 233

Weights (kg) 1.9 Multijet 8V 1.9 Multijet 16V 1.9 Multijet 16V a.t. 2.4 Multijet 20V a.t. Kerb weight (including all fluids, 1520 1530 1540 1650 fuel tank at 90% and with no optional) DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS Payload (*) including the driver: 520 520 520 520 SAFETY Maximum admitted DEVICES loads (**) – front axle: 1150 1150 1150 1200 – rear axle: 1030 1030 1030 1030 – total: 2040 2050 2060 2170 OF THE CAR Towable loads CORRECT USE – trailer with brakes: 1500 1500 1500 1500 – trailer without brakes: 700 700 700 700 WARNING MESSAGES Maximum load on roof (***): 80 80 80 80 LIGHTS AND Maximum load on tow hitch (trailer with brakes): 70 70 70 70 IN AN

(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases EMERGENCY thus reducing the specified payload.

(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads in the boot an/or on the roof so that they com- CAR ply with these limits. MAINTENANCE (***) Lineaccessori Fiat roof rack, max capacity: 50 kg. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

233 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 234

CAPACITIES

1.8 2.2 2.2 a.t. Recommended products and DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS litres kg litres kg litres kg genuine lubricants Fuel tank: 62 – 62 – 62 – Unleaded petrol including a reserve of: 7 - 9 – 7 - 9 – 7 - 9 – with no less than 95 R.O.N SAFETY DEVICES (EN228 Specification) Engine cooling system Mixture of 50% demineralised wa- – with climate control: 7.4 – 7.4 – 7.4 – ter and 50% PARAFLU UP (▲) Engine sump and filter: 4.5 – 5– 5–SELENIA K P.E. OF THE CAR CORRECT USE Mechanical gearbox and TUTELA CAR TECHNYX differential: 1.6 1.3 1.8 1.5 ––TUTELA CAR MATRIX Hydraulic brake circuit WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND with ABS: – 0.750 – 0.750 – 0.750 TUTELA TOP 4 Electrohydraulic power steering circuit: 0.7 0.59 0.9 0.75 0.9 0.75 Contact a Fiat Dealership

IN AN Windscreen/rear window TUTELA PROFESSIONAL EMERGENCY /headlight washer fluid reservoir: (*) 3 (5) – 3 (5) – 3 (5) – SC 35

CAR (*) The values in brackets refer to versions with headlight washers.

MAINTENANCE (▲) For particularly hard climate conditions, we recommend use of a 60% PARAFLU UP and 40% demineralized water mixture. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

234 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 235

1.9 Multijet 1.9 Multijet 1.9 Multijet 2.4 Multijet Recommended products and 8V 16V 16V a.t. 20V a.t. genuine lubricants litres kg litres kg litres kg litres kg DASHBOARD Fuel tank: 62 – 62 – 62 – 62 – Diesel fuel for motor vehicles AND CONTROLS including a reserve of: 7 - 9 – 7 - 9 – 7 - 9 – 7 - 9 – (Specification EN 590) Engine cooling SAFETY system Mixture of 50% demineralised DEVICES – with climate control: 7.7 – 7.7 – 7.7 – 8.4 – water and 50% PARAFLU UP Engine sump and filter: 4.5 – 4.5 – 4.5 – 5.4 – SELENIA WR Mechanical gearbox and TUTELA CAR TECHNYX OF THE CAR differential: 1.9 1.6 1.9 1.6 –– ––TUTELA CAR MATRIX CORRECT USE Hydraulic brake circuit with ABS: – 0.750 – 0.750 – 0.750 – 0.750 TUTELA TOP 4 WARNING MESSAGES Electrohydraulic power LIGHTS AND steering circuit: 0.7 0.59 0.7 0.59 0.7 0.59 0.7 0.59 Contact a Fiat Dealership Windscreen/rear window/ headlight washer TUTELA PROFESSIONAL IN AN fluid reservoir: (*) 3 (5) – 3 (5) – 3 (5) – 3 (5) – SC 35 EMERGENCY

(*) The values in brackets refer to versions with headlight washers. CAR (▲) For particularly hard climate conditions, we recommend use of a 60% PARAFLU UP and 40% demineralized water mixture. MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

235 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 236

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

DASHBOARD RECOMMENDED PRODUCTS AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTROLS

Use Fluid and lubricant specifications Genuine fluids Change for correct car operation and lubricants intervals SAFETY DEVICES

Oils for petrol Synthetic-based oils, grade SAE 5W-40 ACEA C3. SELENIA K P.E. As per Service engines FIAT 9.55535-S2 qualification. Contractual Technical Schedule Reference N° F603.C07 OF THE CAR CORRECT USE Oils for diesel Synthetic-based oils, grade SAE 5W-40 SELENIA WR As per Service engines FIAT 9.55535- N2 qualification. Contractual Technical Schedule Reference N° F515.D06 WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND

For diesel versions, in the case of emergency when original products are not available, lubricants with a minimum performance of

IN AN ACEA B4 are acceptable; in this case, optimal engine performance is not guaranteed and it is recommended to have them replaced

EMERGENCY with a recommended lubricant as soon as possible at the Fiat Service Network. The use of products with inferior characteristics compared to ACEA C3 and ACEA B4 could cause damage, not covered by the guarantee, to the engine. CAR For particularly rigid climatic conditions ask the Fiat Dealership for the appropriate product from the Selenia range. MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

236 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 237

Use Fluid and lubricant specifications Genuine fluids Applications for correct car operation and lubricants

Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 75W-85 TUTELA CAR Mechanical gearbox DASHBOARD that passes API GL-4 PLUS, FIAT 9.55550 specifications. TECHNYX and differential AND CONTROLS Synthetic-based oil, grade SAE 75W-85 TUTELA CAR Mechanical gearbox Lubricants that passes API GL-4 specifications MATRYX and differential SAFETY and greases for DEVICES transmissions Specifc grease to be used for constant-velocity joints with TUTELA CV joints low friction coefficient. N.L.G.I. 0-1 consistency. STAR 700 on differential side

Grease containing Molybdenum bisulphide for high TUTELA ALL STAR CV joints on wheel side temperature appliances. N.L.G.I. 1-2 consistency. OF THE CAR CORRECT USE Brake Synthetic fluid, FMVSS n° 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925 TUTELA TOP 4 Brake and clutch fluid SAE J1704, CUNA NC 956-01 hydraulic controls WARNING Protective Protective with antifreeze action, red colour ● MESSAGES PARAFLU UP ( ) Radiator antifreeze propor- LIGHTS AND agent based on inhibited monoethylen glycol and organic formula, tion: 50% distilled water and for radiators that passes CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 specifications. 50% PARAFLU UP (❑)

Additive for diesel fuels with protective action for Diesel engines TUTELA

Additive for To be used diluted IN AN DIESEL ART

diesel fuel or undiluted EMERGENCY

Windscreen/ Mixture of alcohol and surfactants CUNA NC 956-11 TUTELA To be mixed with diesel fuel rear window/ PROFESSIONAL (25 cc per 10 litres)

headlight SC 35 CAR washer fluid MAINTENANCE

(●) IMPORTANT Do not add or mix fluids having different specifications from that already existing. (❑) For particularly hard climate conditions, we recommend use of a 60% PARAFLU UP and 40% demineralized water mixture. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

237 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 238

FUEL CONSUMPTION ❒ extra-urban cycle: frequent accel- IMPORTANT The type of route, traffic erating in all gears, simulating extrau- situations, weather conditions, driving The fuel consumption figures given in the rban use of the car; the speed varies style, general conditions of the car, trim

DASHBOARD table below are determined on the basis between 0 and 120 km/h; level/equipment/accessories, load, climate AND CONTROLS control system, roof rack, other situations of the homologation tests set down by ❒ combined consumption: is calcu- specific European Directives. that affect air drag may lead to different lated weighing about 37% of urban cy- fuel consumption levels than those mea- The procedures below are followed for cle consumption and about 63% of SAFETY sured. DEVICES measuring consumption: extraurban consumption. ❒ urban cycle: cold starting followed by driving that simulates urban use of the car; OF THE CAR CORRECT USE WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

238 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 239

Fuel consumption according to Directive 1999/100/EC (litres x 100 km) Petrol versions

1.8 2.2 2.2 a.t. DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS Urban 9.8 11.4 12.5

Extra-urban 6.0 6.7 7.6 SAFETY DEVICES Combined 7.4 8.4 9.4 OF THE CAR Multijet versions CORRECT USE 1.9 Multijet 8V 1.9 Multijet 16V 1.9 Multijet 16V a.t. 2.4 Multijet 20V a.t. Urban 7.9 8.1 9.3 10.3 WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND Extra-urban 5.0 4.9 5.8 5.4 Combined 6.1 6.1 7.1 7.2 IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

239 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 240

CO2 EMISSIONS

The CO2, emission levels at the exhaust given in the following table refer to combined consumption. DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS CO2 emissions according to 1999/100/EC Directive (g/km)

Petrol versions SAFETY DEVICES 1.8 2.2 2.2 a.t.

175 199 222 OF THE CAR CORRECT USE WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND Multijet versions 1.9 Multijet 8V 1.9 Multijet 16V 1.9 Multijet 16V a.t. 2.4 Multijet 20V a.t.

IN AN 160 160 187 191 EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

240 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 241

RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: Ministerial Certifications DASHBOARD

Certification number AND CONTROLS T194 NTR194 SAFETY European Union and DEVICES Countries applying EC directive

AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC MR 2062 ANRT 2005 le 03/06/2005

MR 2061 ANRT 2005 le 03/06/2005 OF THE CAR Désignation : Emetteur Désignation : Emetteur / recepteur CORRECT USE Morocco Marque / type : TRW / T194 Marque / type : TRW / NTR194 Constructeur / Pays : TRW Automotive Italia SPA / Italy Constructeur / Pays : TRW Automotive Italia SPA / Italy WARNING MESSAGES TA-2005/817 TA-2005/816 LIGHTS AND South Africa APPROVATED APPROVATED IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

241 217-242 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:16 Pagina 242 DASHBOARD AND CONTROLS SAFETY DEVICES OF THE CAR CORRECT USE WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND IN AN EMERGENCY CAR MAINTENANCE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS INDEX

242 243-252 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:26 Pagina 243

IINNDDEEXX DASHBOARD ABS ...... 94 Boot hatch...... 84 – courtesy lights ...... 70 AND CONTROLS – ABS system failure warning light 148 – emergency opening ...... 85 – courtesy mirror ceiling light lamp ABS system ...... 94 Boot light...... 180 replacement...... 179 – door clearance/puddle ceiling

Boot...... 84 SAFETY Additional heater...... 61 light lamp replacement ...... 180 DEVICES – baggage cover shade ...... 87 Air bag – front ...... 70 – double load compartment...... 88 – air bag failure warning light...... 146 – front ceiling light lamp Air filter (replacement) ...... 207 – emergency opening ...... 85 replacement...... 178 Alarm...... 14 – enlargement...... 85 – glove compartment ceiling light OF THE CAR – alarm failure warning light ...... 151 – load anchoring...... 89 lamp replacement...... 179 CORRECT USE – break-in attempt warning light ... 151 – opening and closing...... 84 – rear ...... 70 Antenna ...... 101 – repositioning the rear seat ...... 88 – side rear ceiling light lamp Antilifting (protection)...... 15 Brake Assist (emergency braking replacement...... 181 WARNING MESSAGES Ashtray (front/rear) ...... 77 assistance) ...... 87 Changing a lamp...... 169 LIGHTS AND ASR system ...... 97 Brake fluid Changing a wheel...... 159 ASR...... 97 – insufficient brake liquid warning Chassis (marking)...... 219 light...... 146

Automatic air conditioner ...... 52 Child safety device...... 81 IN AN – level check...... 206 Automatic headlamp sensor Cigar lighter ...... 76 EMERGENCY (twilight sensor) ...... 64 Brakes CO emissions ...... 240 – brake pad wear warning light...... 156 2 Code Card ...... 10 Backing light...... 176 – characteristics ...... 224 Constant speed regulator CAR Battery – Hill Holder failure warning light. 154

(Cruise Control) ...... 68 MAINTENANCE – battery recharging ...... 190 – liquid level ...... 206 – checking the charge status...... 208 Consumption – insufficient battery recharge Car radio...... 100 – engine oil ...... 204 warning light ...... 148 – antenna ...... 101 – fuel...... 238-239 Courtesy mirror TECHNICAL

– replacing the battery...... 208 – audio system ...... 100 SPECIFICATIONS – startup with an auxiliary battery 158 – Hi-Fi system ...... 101 – ceiling light lamp replacement..... 179 – useful advice for extending Car seats (suitability of use) ...... 115 Courtesy mirror ceiling lights...... 179 battery life...... 209 Ceiling lights Cruise Control (constant speed Body – boot ceiling light lamp regulator) ...... 68 IINDEX – maintenance...... 213 replacement...... 180 – constant speed regulator warning – version codes ...... 220 – central light ...... 70 light (Cruise Control) ...... 156 243 243-252 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:26 Pagina 244

Cup holder compartments...... 76 – excessive temperature warning Flashing...... 63 Cup/can holder ...... 76 light...... 148 Fog light – level check...... 204 – orientation ...... 94

DASHBOARD Engine cooling system liquid level .... 204 AND CONTROLS Dashboard and controls ...... 4 Follow me home (device) ...... 64 Dead lock (device) ...... 16 Engine hood ...... 90 Front air bags...... 118 Diesel filter Engine oil – front driver’s side air bag...... 119 – characteristics ...... 236 – front passenger’s side air bag...... 120 SAFETY – condensate water drain ...... 207 DEVICES – water in diesel filter warning – consumption...... 204 – driver’s side knee air bag ...... 120 light...... 151 – degraded oil warning light ...... 149 – general warnings...... 124 Diesel Particulate Filter ...... 106 – insufficient engine oil pressure – turning off the passenger side warning light ...... 149 Dimensions ...... 230 front and side chest protection air bags (Side Bags) ...... 121 OF THE CAR – level check...... 203 CORRECT USE Door clearance/puddle light...... 180 – minimum engine oil level warning – passenger side front and side Doors...... 81 light...... 156 chest protection air bag warnings – centralized closing ...... 81 Engine oil level...... 203 light (Side Bag) off ...... 147 – child safety device...... 81 Front armrest with storage box WARNING MESSAGES Environmental protection...... 105 LIGHTS AND and cooled compartment...... 74 – emergency closing ...... 13 EOBD (system) ...... 98 – emergency opening ...... 13 Front ceiling lights EOBD system...... 98 – control ...... 70 – incomplete door closure ESP (system) ...... 96 IN AN warning light ...... 149 – lamp replacement...... 178

EMERGENCY ESP system ...... 96 Front fog lights EBD (system) – ESP system failure warning light . 154 – control ...... 71 – EBD system failure warning light 148 Exterior lamp replacement...... 173 – fog lights warning light...... 154

CAR Electric socket...... 77 Exterior lights – lamp replacement...... 175 – control ...... 62 MAINTENANCE Electric window regulators Front optical units – exterior lights failure warning – lamp replacement...... 173 – controls ...... 82 light...... 152 Emergency lights ...... 71 Fuel – consumption...... 238 Engine Fiat CODE (system) ...... 9 TECHNICAL – fuel block switch ...... 72 SPECIFICATIONS – identification code...... 220 – electronic key not recognised – fuel reserve warning light ...... 150 – marking ...... 219 warning light ...... 151 – level indicator...... 21 – typical data ...... 221 – vehicle protection system failure warning light ...... 151 – saving fuel ...... 138 INDEX Engine compartment (washing) ...... 215 Fiat CODE system...... 9 Fuel block switch and electric power Engine coolant temperature indicator 21 Fix & go automatic supply ...... 72 244 Engine cooling system liquid (rapid tyre repair kit) ...... 165 Fuel hatch ...... 104 243-252 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:26 Pagina 245

Fuel level indicator ...... 21 Identification data...... 218 Load (anchoring)...... 89 Fuel reserve Ignition device...... 19 Long vehicle inactivity...... 144 – fuel reserve warning light ...... 150 In an emergency...... 157 Low beams DASHBOARD Fuel tank plug...... 104 Injection system – control ...... 62 AND CONTROLS – Follow Me Home...... 154 Fuses – EOBD engine control system – fuse replacement ...... 181 failure warning light...... 149 – lamp replacement...... 173 – low beam light warning light ...... 154

– fuse table ...... 186 SAFETY

– injection system failure warning DEVICES light...... 149 Lubricants...... 236 eneric warning light ...... 152 G Instrument dashboard...... 5 Glasses holder...... 76 Maintenance and care Instrument panel...... 6 Glove compartment light...... 179 – Demanding vehicle use...... 197 Interior equipment ...... 74 – periodical checks ...... 197 OF THE CAR

Glove compartment...... 75 CORRECT USE Interiors – planned maintenance ...... 194 – ceiling light lamp replacement..... 179 – maintenance...... 215 – Scheduled Maintenance Plan ...... 195 Head rests Isofix Universal (car seat) ...... 117 Manual air conditioner...... 49 – front ...... 42 “Isofix Universale” car seat ...... 117 Maximum speed...... 231 WARNING MESSAGES – rear ...... 42 – installation presetting...... 117 Money holder ...... 76 LIGHTS AND Headlamps...... 93 – suitability of use ...... 118 Multifunctional display ...... 22 – control buttons...... 22 – headlamp adjustment overseas... 94 eys...... 10

K IN AN – headlamp stability corrector...... 93 – display functions...... 28

– emergency key...... 13 EMERGENCY – light beam orientation ...... 93 – setup menu ...... 23 – key with remote control ...... 11 Headlight washer-wiper – standard screen...... 22 – control ...... 67 Lamps (replacement) n board instruments...... 20 O CAR – liquid level ...... 205 – exterior lamp replacement...... 173

aint (maintenance) ...... 214 MAINTENANCE Heated rear window – general information...... 169 P – heated rear window warning – interior lamp replacement...... 178 Parking brake...... 131 light...... 151 – lamp types...... 170 – parking brake engaged warning light-...... 146

Level checks...... 198 TECHNICAL Heating and air conditioning ...... 47 Parking lights...... 72 SPECIFICATIONS Heating/air conditioning system ...... 47 Levels Parking sensors ...... 102 – level checks...... 198 High-beam headlights Parking...... 131 – control ...... 62 License plate lights – parking brake...... 131 – lamp replacement...... 178 IINDEX – flashing ...... 63 Passenger compartment air – high beam light warning light...... 155 3rd stop lights...... 177 diffusers...... 48 – lamp replacement...... 174 Liquids and lubricants ...... 236 245 243-252 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:26 Pagina 246

Performance ...... 231 Rear fog light...... 72 Seat belts Plates – rear fog light warning light...... 152 – general warnings...... 111 – body paint ...... 219 Rear optical units – load limiters...... 110

DASHBOARD – maintenance...... 112 AND CONTROLS – identification data ...... 218 – fixed side optical unit...... 176 Pollen filter (replacement)...... 207 – lamp replacement...... 175 – seat belts not fastened warning light...... 147 Position lights – optical unit on boot hatch...... 175 Rear sunshade curtains...... 78 – use ...... 108 SAFETY – control ...... 62 DEVICES Seats – front lamp replacement...... 174 Rear view mirrors – adjustment “at the table”...... 40 – position light warning light ...... 154 – electrochromic interior ...... 44 – cleaning ...... 215 – rear lamp replacement ...... 177 – exterior ...... 44 – interior ...... 44 – electrically adjusted front ...... 41 Power steering – manually adjusted front ...... 39 OF THE CAR

CORRECT USE Rear window washer-wiper – failure warning light...... 149 – rear ...... 42 – liquid...... 205 – control ...... 67 – liquid level ...... 205 Side air bags ...... 122 Power steering liquid – front and rear side chest – level check...... 205 Rear window wiper protection air bags (Side bags) .. 122 WARNING MESSAGES LIGHTS AND Power steering liquid level...... 205 – brush ...... 212 – head protection side air bags Power supply – control ...... 67 (Window Bags) ...... 122 – Technical data ...... 223 – sprayers ...... 213 – general warnings...... 124 Reconfigurable multifunctional – turning off the front and rear side IN AN Presetting for “Isofix Universale” display ...... 25 chest protection air bags EMERGENCY car seat installation ...... 117 – control buttons...... 25 (Side bags) ...... 123 Pretensioners...... 110 – display functions...... 28 – rear side chest protection air bag – load limiters...... 110 – setup menu ...... 25 warning lights (Rear Side Bags) CAR – warnings...... 111 – standard screen...... 26 off ...... 156 MAINTENANCE Provided tools ...... 162 Refuelling ...... 234 Smokers kit...... 76 Regulations for vehicle handling at Snow chains ...... 143 Radio frequency remote control: Spark plugs Ministerial Certification ...... 241 the end of its life cycle...... 247 Roof rack/ski rack...... 92 – spark plug preheating failure TECHNICAL Radio transmitters and cell phones . 101 warning light ...... 150 SPECIFICATIONS Rubber piping (warnings) ...... 211 Rain sensor...... 66 – spark plug preheating warning Rear armrest...... 75 light...... 150 S.B.R. (system) ...... 109 Rear ceiling lights Spark plugs (type) ...... 221

INDEX Safety ...... 107 – control ...... 70 Speedometer ...... 21 Saving fuel...... 138 – lamp replacement...... 181 Starting and driving...... 127 246 243-252 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:26 Pagina 247

Starting the engine...... 128 Transmission – replacement...... 159 – coasting startup...... 159 – Technical data ...... 223 – spare (characteristics) ...... 227 – heating the just started engine.... 130 Transporting children safely ...... 112 Wheel alignment...... 225

– ignition device ...... 17 DASHBOARD Trip computer...... 36 Wheel rims AND CONTROLS – procedure for gasoline versions... 128 Turn signals – correct rim reading...... 226 – procedure for Multijet versions ... 129 – control ...... 63 Wheels and tyres...... 210 – startup with an auxiliary battery... 158 – cornering lights ...... 63 – cold inflating pressure...... 228 SAFETY – turning off the engine ...... 130 – front lamp replacement...... 174 – correct rim reading...... 226 DEVICES Steering (characteristics)...... 224 – lane change function ...... 63 – correct tyre reading...... 225 Steering lock ...... 19 – left turn signal warning light ...... 154 – rims and tyres ...... 225 Steering wheel (adjustment)...... 43 – rear lamp replacement ...... 176 – rims and tyres ...... 227

– spare wheel...... 225 OF THE CAR Storage box...... 76 – right turn signal warning light ..... 154 CORRECT USE Sun roof ...... 78 – side lamp replacement...... 175 – wheel alignment...... 225 Sun visor...... 77 Tyre pressure...... 228 Window cleaning ...... 65 Suspensions (characteristics)...... 224 Tyres Windows (cleaning) ...... 215 WARNING MESSAGES Symbols...... 8 – correct tyre reading...... 225 Windscreen washer LIGHTS AND – provided ...... 227 – control ...... 65 T.P.M.S. system – snow...... 142 – liquid level ...... 205 (tyre pressure control)...... 99 – wheel replacement...... 159 Windscreen washer/rear window Table (seat) ...... 40 washer-wiper/headlight IN AN Tachometer ...... 20 User purchased accessories ...... 101 washer-wiper liquid EMERGENCY Technical data...... 217 Vehicle inactivity...... 144 – level check...... 205 Trailer towing...... 139 Windscreen washer/rear window Vehicle lifting...... 190 washer-wiper/headlight CAR – assembly diagram...... 141 Vehicle refuelling...... 103

washer-wiper liquid level...... 205 MAINTENANCE – tow hook installation...... 140 Vehicle towing...... 191 – warnings...... 139 Windscreen wiper Volumetric protection...... 15 – brushes ...... 212 Transmission – control ...... 65 – automatic transmission failure arning lights and messages ...... 145 W – rain sensor ...... 66 TECHNICAL warning light ...... 155 – general warnings...... 146 SPECIFICATIONS – sprayers ...... 213 – maximum automatic transmission Weight ...... 232 oil temperature warning light ..... 155 Windscreen wiper and rear window – using the automatic electronic Wheel wiper brushes ...... 212 transmission...... 133 – Fix & go automatic rapid tyre IINDEX – using the manual transmission.... 132 repair kit ...... 165 247 243-252 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:26 Pagina 248

RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSIONS

DASHBOARD The presence and the position of the instruments and warning lights may vary according to the versions.

F0L0517m fig. 1

1. Side air vent - 2. Right steering column stalk: windscreen, rear window wiper and trip computer controls - 3. Instrument panel and warning lights - 4. Left steering column stalk: external lights - 5. Central air vents - 6. Sound system - 7. Front passenger air bag - 8. Glovebox - 9. Heating/ventilation/climate controls - 10. Gearshift lever - 11. Cruise control lever - 12. Driver’s knees air bag - 13. Driver’s air bag - 14. Control unit access door - 15. Control plate. 248 243-252 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:26 Pagina 249

INSTRUMENT PANEL 1.8 - 1.9 Multijet 8V versions with multifunctional display A Speedometer (speed indicator) B Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light C Engine coolant temperature gauge and excessive temperature warning light D Rev counter E multifunctional display m c Warning lights fitted on Multijet versions F0L0508m t Warning light fitted on versions with automatic transmission On versions 1.8 the end scale value of the engine speed indicator is 8000 rpm.

1.8 - 1.9 Multijet 8V with reconfigurable multifunctional display A Speedometer (speed indicator) B Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light C Engine coolant temperature gauge and excessive temperature warning light D Rev counter E Reconfigurable multifunctional display c F0L0509m m Warning lights fitted on Multijet versions On versions 1.8 the end scale value of the engine speed indicator is 8000 rpm. t Warning light fitted on versions with automatic transmission fig. 2 249 243-252 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:26 Pagina 250

2.2 - 1.9 Multijet 16V versions - 2.4 Multijet 20V with multifunctional display A Speedometer (speed indicator) B Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light C Engine coolant temperature gauge and excessive temperature warning light D Rev counter E Multifunctional display m c Warning lights fitted on Multijet F0L0510m versions t Warning light fitted on versions with On Multijet versions the end scale value of the engine speed indicator is 6000 rpm. automatic transmission

2.2 - 1.9 Multijet 16V - 2.4 Multijet 20V with reconfigurable multifunctional display A Speedometer (speed indicator) B Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light C Engine coolant temperature gauge and excessive temperature warning light D Rev counter E Reconfigurable multifunctional display F0L0511m m c Warning lights fitted on Multijet versions On Multijet versions the end scale value of the engine speed indicator is 6000 rpm. t Warning light fitted on versions with automatic transmission fig. 3 250 243-252 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:26 Pagina 251

PROVISIONS FOR THE PROCESSING OF A VEHICLE AT THE END OF ITS LIFE-CYCLE

For years now Fiat has been developing its global commitment towards the safeguarding and protection of the Environment through the continuous improvement of its production processes and the making of increasingly more “eco friendly” products. With a view to guaranteeing the best possible service to clients in full observance of environmental standards and in response to the obligations im- posed by European Directive 2000/53/EC on end-of-life vehicles, Fiat offers its clients the possibility to hand in their vehicle* at the end of its life span without additional costs. The European Directive, in fact, provides for the take-back of the vehicle without the last holder or owner of the same incurring expenses due to the fact that the market value of the vehicle is zero or negative. In particular, in almost all of the countries of the European Union, up until 1st January 2007, take-back of the vehicle free of charge only applies to vehicles registered from 1 July 2002 on, while, from 2007 on, take-back will be carried out free of charge, independently of the year of registration, provided that the vehicle still contains all its essential component parts (especially engine and body) and is free from additional waste materials. Our contracted network of authorised treatment facilities has been carefully selected in order to provide a quality service to our customers by de-polluting and recycling “End of Life Vehicles” to approved environmental standards. To find out the location of your nearest authorised treatment facility, offering free of charge take-back, simply contact one of our dealers or refer to the Fiat web site or call the toll free number 00800 3428 0000. * Passenger transportation vehicles to seat a max. of nine persons, having a total admissible weight of 3.5 t 243-252 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:26 Pagina 252

NNOOTTEESS 243-252 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:26 Pagina 253 243-252 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:26 Pagina 254 243-252 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:26 Pagina 255 243-252 Croma TRW GB 28-09-2007 14:26 Pagina 256

COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar) STANDARD TYRES SPARE Versions Size Medium load Full load WHEEL Front Rear Front Rear 205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6 1.8 215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5 4.2 215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.6 205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.8 2.7 215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5 2.2 4.2 215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6 225/45 R18 95W 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6 205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6 215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5 2.2 a.t. 4.2 1.9 Multijet 8V 215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.5 225/45 R18 95W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.5 205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.8 2.7 215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5 1.9 Multijet 16V 4.2 215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6 225/45 R18 95W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.5 205/55 R16 91V 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6 215/55 R16 93W 2.4 2.4 2.5 2.5 1.9 Multijet 16V a.t. 4.2 215/50 R17 91W 2.4 2.4 2.7 2.6 225/45 R18 95W 2.4 2.4 2.6 2.5 215/50 R17 95W 2.6 2.5 2.9 2.7 2.4 Multijet 20V a.t. 4.2 225/45 R18 95W 2.6 2.5 2.8 2.6

ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT 2.2 2.2 a.t. 1.9 Multijet 8V 1.9 Multijet 16V 1.9 Multijet 16V a.t. 2.4 Multijet 20V a.t. litres kg litres kg litres kg litres kg litres kg litres kg Sump and filter 5 – 5 – 4.5 – 4.5 – 4.5 – 5.4 –

FUEL CAPACITY Tank capacity: 62 litres Riserve: 7 - 9 litres Only refuel cars with petrol engines with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) not less than 95. Only refuel cars with diesel engines with diesel fuel for motor vehicles conforming to the EN590 European Specification

Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. - Servizi al Cliente - Assistenza Tecnica - Ingegneria Assistenziale - Largo Senatore G. Agnelli, 5 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italia) Print N. 603.81.275 - 09/2007 - 1st edition